IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader 

Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Machine Type 3572

GC27-2212-00
IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader 

Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Machine Type 3572

GC27-2212-00
 Note:
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information in ″Notices″ located in
the back of this publication.

To ensure that you have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/lto.

This edition applies to the IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide,
GC27-2212-00, and to the subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2008. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Read this First

Accessing Online Technical Support

For online Technical Support for your library, visit:
http://www.ibm.com/support/

Registering for My Notification

My Notification registration provides e-mail notification when new firmware levels
have been updated and are available for download and installation.

To register for My Notification:

1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/
2. Click Get support.
3. Click My support.

Sending Us Your Comments

Your feedback is important in helping IBM provide accurate and useful information.
If you have comments or suggestions for improving this publication, send your
comments by:
• E-mailing IBM:
– Internet or IBMLink™ from US: starpubs@us.ibm.com
– IBMLink from Canada: STARPUBS at TORIBM
Include the following information in your e-mail:
– Exact publication title
– Form number (for example, GA32-1234-02) or part number (located on the back
cover of the publication)
– Page number to which you are referring
• Using the Readers’ Comments form at the back of this publication
• Mailing your comments to:

International Business Machines Corporation

Information Development
Department GZW
9000 South Rita Road
Tucson, AZ 85744-0001 USA

Contacting IBM Technical Support

In the USA: Call 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378).

Before calling, complete all the steps in “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on
page 7-1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 iii

 In all countries/regions: Visit http://www.ibm.com, and complete all the steps in
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-1.

To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click on Open a
service request.

iv TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Contents
Read this First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Web User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Accessing Online Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Registering for My Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Common Header Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Sending Us Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Menus Available from the Web User Interface . . . 2-7
Contacting IBM Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Chapter 3. Installation and

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Verifying the Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Choosing a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Safety and Environmental Notices . . . . xiii Installing the Deskside Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Danger Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Installing in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Caution Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Removing the Accessor Locking Screw . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Laser Safety and Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Attaching the Library to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Class I Laser Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Connecting the Host Interface Cables . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Performing the Safety Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . xiv Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Rack Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Configuring Your Library using the Web User
Product Recycling and Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Battery Return Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii Logging in to the Web User Interface . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Checking Firmware Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Configuring Library Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Configuring Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Configuring Date and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Chapter 1. Product Description . . . . . . .1-1 Configuring Encryption Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Configuring E-mail Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Cartridge Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Configuring Trap Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Managing User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Saving the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
SAS Host Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Configuring Your Library using the Operator
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Supported Internet Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Logging in to the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
SNMP Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Configuring Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Configuring Library Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Network Time Protocol (NTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Populating the Library with Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Ultrium Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Verifying Library and Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Speed Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Taking the Library Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Channel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Registering for My Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Chapter 4. Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Location Coordinates and Element Addresses . . . . . . 1-8 Monitoring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Library Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Managing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Product Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Supported Servers, Operating Systems, and Servicing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Using the Web User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Supported Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Monitoring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Managing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Chapter 2. User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 Configuring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Servicing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Screen Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 v

Chapter 5. Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Moving the Library from a Desktop to a Rack . . . . . . 8-7
Data Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Removing Library from a Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Cartridge Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Installing the Library in a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Capacity Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Replacing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
WORM (Write Once, Read Many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Applying a RID Tag to a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
WORM Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Data Security on WORM Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Chapter 9. Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
WORM Media Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Requirements for WORM Capability . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Power Cords and Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cartridge Memory Chip (LTO-CM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Bar Code Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Appendix A. Information for Trained
Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 IBM Service Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Write-Protect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Web User Interface Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Cartridge Care and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Logging in to the Web User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Provide Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Common Header Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Ensure Proper Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Menus Available from the Web User Interface . . . A-3
Provide Proper Acclimation and User Privilege Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Connecting to the Library using the Telnet
Perform a Thorough Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Service Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Handle the Cartridge Carefully . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Drive/Cartridge Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Examples of Cartridge Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Removing/reinstalling the Library Chassis
Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin . . . . . . . . 5-11 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Repositioning a Leader Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Removing/reinstalling the Tape Drive
Reattaching a Leader Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 from/in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Manually Removing a Tape Cartridge from
Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Disposing of Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Removing a Stuck Cartridge Magazine . . . . . . . . A-21
Ordering Media Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Ordering Bar Code Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Appendix B. Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Library Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Chapter 6. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Drive Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
How the Library Reports Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Web User Interface Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Library Error Message Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Trap Definitions (Types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Diagnosing a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Isolating Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags . . . . . . . . C-1
Isolating Library Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library . . . . . . . . . C-1
Isolating Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape
Isolating Web User Interface Problems . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems . . . 6-7
Installation and Configuration Problems . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Appendix D. Sense Data . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Interpreting Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Sense Key Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Reseating Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Library Sense Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
E-mailing Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Tape Drive Sense Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Chapter 7. Service Procedures . . . . . . . 7-1 Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the

Using the IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool
Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1
(ITDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Obtaining Error Information From an IBM™
Contacting IBM Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
System p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
SCSI Sense Data Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement
SCSI Sense Data – Library Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 SCSI Sense Data – Tape Drive Error . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Retrieving from a Sun System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Replacing a Defective Cartridge Magazine . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Retrieving from an HP-UX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually . . . . . . 8-1 Retrieving From an IBM System i™ with RISC
Moving the Library from a Rack to a Desktop . . . . . . 8-2 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Removing Library from a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Installing the Library on a Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

vi TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Appendix F. Library Configuration Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-1 Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-2
Physical Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Logical Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-2
Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 European Union (EU) Electromagnetic
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-3
Encryption Settings (S4H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2 People’s Republic of China Class A Electronic
Library and Drive Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-3
Users Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement . .H-3
My Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-4
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance
Keyboard Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Avis de conformité à la réglementation
Navigating by keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 d’Industrie Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-4
Accessing the publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-4
Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement . .H-5

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1

Contents vii
viii TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Figures
1-1 TS2900 Tape Autoloader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 3-33 Cartridge orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
1-2 Front panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 4-1 Operator Panel top level menus . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
1-3 Cartridge magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 4-2 Configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
1-4 Cartridge magazine (top view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 4-3 Current information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
1-5 Rear panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 4-4 Hardware attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
1-6 Ultrium Half-High Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 4-5 Unlock I/O Station command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
1-7 Location coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 4-6 I/O Station unlocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
2-1 Operator Panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 4-7 Unlock Magazine command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
2-2 Library ready screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 4-8 Move Cartridge command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
2-3 Password entry screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 4-9 Unload command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
2-4 Screen elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 4-10 Clean Drive command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
2-5 Confirmation screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 4-11 Inventory command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
2-6 Java security warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 4-12 Online/Offline command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
2-7 Login window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 4-13 Move to Ship Position command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
2-8 User account window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 4-14 Reboot Drive command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
2-9 Superuser account window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 4-15 Reboot Library command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
2-10 Administrator account window . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 4-16 Logout command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
3-1 Attaching side rails to the library chassis . . . . 3-3 4-17 I/O Station setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
3-2 Attaching the feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 4-18 Auto Cleaning settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
3-3 Attaching the cover to the library chassis 4-19 Active slot count settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
(side screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 4-20 Library access mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
3-4 Attaching the cover to the library chassis 4-21 Date and Time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
(rear screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 4-22 Network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
3-5 Rack mount screw locations for front 4-23 Operator Panel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
vertical rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 4-24 Factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
3-6 Rack mount screw locations for rear 4-25 Error status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
vertical rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 4-26 Library Verify diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
3-7 Attaching the front brackets to the library 4-27 Drive diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 4-28 SAS wrap tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
3-8 Attaching the rear brackets to the rails . . . . . . 3-9 4-29 Web User Interface menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
3-9 Creating the rail assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 4-30 System Summary screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
3-10 Installing the rail assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 4-31 Library Map screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
3-11 Securing the front of the library in the 4-32 Move Cartridges screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 4-33 Unload Drive screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
3-12 Securing the rear of the library in the rack . . 3-11 4-34 Clean Drive screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
3-13 The cables at the rear of the library . . . . . . . . 3-12 4-35 Library State screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
3-14 Accessor locking screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 4-36 Inventory screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
3-15 Interface cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 4-37 Inventory progress bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
3-16 Java security warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 4-38 User Access screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
3-17 Web User Interface login screen . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 4-39 Physical library settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
3-18 System summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 4-40 Logical library settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
3-19 Logical library mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 4-41 Network settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
3-20 Cartridge assignment settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 4-42 Encryption settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
3-21 Network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 4-43 Encryption settings enabled screen . . . . . . . . 4-24
3-22 Date and Time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 4-44 Date and Time settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
3-23 Encryption settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 4-45 E-mail settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
3-24 Encryption enabled settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 4-46 SNMP settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
3-25 E-mail notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 4-47 Configuration using cookies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
3-26 Trap notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 4-48 Save/Restore screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
3-27 Trap list settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 4-49 Key Path Diagnostics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
3-28 SNMPv3 user list settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 4-50 Operator Interventions screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
3-29 User access settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 4-51 View Library Logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
3-30 Add User dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 4-52 Traces screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
3-31 Save configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 4-53 Download Drive Logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
3-32 Cartridge release gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 4-54 Download Library Logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 ix

4-55 Reset Library/Drive screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 8-16 Removing side rails from the library
4-56 Firmware Update screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
4-57 Usage Statistics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 8-17 Attaching the front brackets to the library
5-1 IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge . . . 5-1 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
5-2 Ultrium WORM Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 8-18 Attaching the rear brackets to the rails . . . . . 8-10
5-3 Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 4 8-19 Creating the rail assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 8-20 Installing the rail assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
5-4 Setting the write-protect switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 8-21 Securing the front of the library in the
5-5 Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
5-6 Double-boxing tape cartridges for 8-22 Securing the rear of the library in the
shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
5-7 Checking for gaps in the seams of a 8-23 The cables at the rear of the library . . . . . . . . 8-12
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 8-24 Removing Accessor locking screw . . . . . . . . 8-12
5-8 Leader pin in the incorrect and correct 8-25 Library configuration using cookies . . . . . . . 8-13
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 8-26 Auto saved data confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
5-9 Placing the dislodged leader pin into the 8-27 Overwrite confirmation dialog box . . . . . . . . 8-14
correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 8-28 Save/Restore screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
5-10 Rewinding the tape into the cartridge . . . . . . 5-13 8-29 RID tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
5-11 Leader Pin Reattachment Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 9-1 Types of power cord receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
5-12 Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the A-1 Java security warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 A-2 Login window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
5-13 Winding the tape out of the cartridge . . . . . . 5-16 A-3 Service account window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
5-14 Removing the C-clip from the leader pin . . . 5-16 A-4 Removing screws from the rear of the
5-15 Attaching the leader pin to the tape . . . . . . . 5-17 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
6-1 Front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 A-5 Removing the deskside cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
8-1 Cartridge magazine lock release access A-6 Removing side rails from the library
hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
8-2 Insert Accessor locking screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 A-7 Removing screws at the rear of the library . . A-7
8-3 Remove cables at the rear of the library . . . . . 8-3 A-8 Removing screws at the front of the
8-4 Removing screws at the rear of the library . . . 8-3 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
8-5 Removing screws at the front of the A-9 Library chassis cover screw locations . . . . . . . A-8
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 A-10 Library chassis cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
8-6 Removing the front brackets from the A-11 Internal components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
library chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 A-12 Rear panel of the SAS Half-high drive . . . . . A-10
8-7 Attaching side rails to the library chassis . . . . 8-5 A-13 Drive housing screw locations . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
8-8 Attaching the feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 A-14 Tape drive removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
8-9 Attaching the cover to the library chassis A-15 Removing the bezel and the cover from
(side screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 the internal drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
8-10 Attaching the cover to the library chassis A-16 Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
(rear screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 A-17 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
8-11 Removing Accessor locking screw . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
8-12 Insert Accessor locking screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 A-18 Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
8-13 Removing screws from the rear of the A-19 Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 A-20 Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
8-14 Removing the cover from the library A-21 Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 A-22 Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
8-15 Removing the feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A-23 Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20

x TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Tables
1-1 Data capacity and recording format . . . . . . . . 1-2 5-6 Environment for operating, storing, and
1-2 Front panel component descriptions . . . . . . . . 1-2 shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge . . 5-18
1-3 Rear panel component descriptions . . . . . . . . . 1-4 5-7 Media supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
1-4 Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge 5-8 Authorized suppliers of custom bar code
compatibility with Ultrium tape drive . . . . . . 1-8 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
1-5 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 6-1 Front Panel LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
1-6 Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 9-1 Optional features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
1-7 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 9-2 Customer replaceable units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
1-8 Operational specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 9-3 Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
1-9 Acoustical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 A-1 Menu commands and access privileges . . . . . A-4
2-1 Operator Panel component descriptions . . . . . 2-1 A-2 Internal component descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
3-1 Location criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 B-1 Library error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
3-2 Deskside kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 B-2 Drive error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
3-3 Rack mount assembly kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 B-3 Web user error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
3-4 Default library configuration settings . . . . . . 3-15 B-4 Trap list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
5-1 Ultrium data cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 C-1 TapeAlert flags supported by the library . . . . C-1
5-2 Data capacity and recording format . . . . . . . . 5-2 C-2 TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium
5-3 Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
compatibility with Ultrium tape drive . . . . . . 5-3 D-1 Sense key definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
5-4 Bar code label requirements for the D-2 Library sense data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Ultrium tape drive and library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 D-3 Ultrium Tape drive sense data . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
5-5 Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with E-1 Device driver types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive . . . . . 5-6 E-2 Library sense data example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E-3 Drive sense data example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 xi

xii TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Safety and Environmental Notices
When using this product, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices that are
contained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the
severity of the safety condition.

Most danger or caution notices contain a reference number (Dxxxx or Cxxxx). Use the
reference number to check the translation in the IBM Systems Safety Information
Manual (G229-9054) publication included in your ship group.

The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples.

Danger Notice

A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is

potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people. A
lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice
to represent a dangerous electrical condition

Caution Notice
A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people
because of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied by one of
several symbols:

If the symbol is… It means…

A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than

electrical danger.

A generally hazardous condition not represented by other

safety symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the

product. Laser symbols are always accompanied by the
classification of the laser as defined by the U. S. Department
of Health and Human Services (for example, Class I, Class
II, and so forth).

A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or

around the product.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 xiii

 If the symbol is… It means…

A hazardous condition due to the weight of the unit. Weight

symbols are accompanied by an approximation of the

svc00167
product’s weight.
18-32 kg (39.7-70.5 lbs)

Laser Safety and Compliance

Before using the library, review the following laser safety information.

Class I Laser Product

The library may contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance
standards set by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser product.
Class I laser products do not emit hazardous laser radiation. The library has the
necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is
inaccessible during operation or is within Class I limits. External safety agencies have
reviewed the library and have obtained approvals to the latest standards as they
apply.

Performing the Safety Inspection Procedure

Before you service the unit, perform the following safety inspection procedure:
1. Stop all activity between the host and the library’s tape drive.
2. Turn off the power to the library by switching the Power button on the rear of the
tape library to the Off position.
3. Disconnect the tape drive’s SAS cable.
4. Unplug the library’s power cord from the electrical outlet and the library’s power
supply unit.
5. Check the library’s power cords for damage, such as a pinched, cut, or frayed
cord.
6. Check the tape drive’s SAS cable for damage.
7. Check the cover of the library for sharp edges, damage, or alterations that expose
its internal parts.
8. Check the cover of the library for proper fit. It should be in place and secure.
9. Check the product label at the rear of the library to make sure it matches the
voltage at your outlet.

xiv TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Rack Safety
The following general safety information should be used for all rack mounted
devices.

DANGER

• Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.

• Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
• To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanical loading, always
install the heaviest devices in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Always install
servers and optional devices starting from the bottom of the rack cabinet.
• Rack mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or work space. Do not place
any object on top of rack mounted devices.
• Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Be sure to disconnect
all power cords in the rack cabinet before servicing any device in the rack
cabinet.
• Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power devices installed in the
same rack cabinet. Do not plug a power cord from a device installed in one rack
cabinet into a power device installed in a different rack cabinet.
• An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on
the metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and
grounded to prevent an electrical shock.

CAUTION:
• Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures will
exceed the manufacturer’s recommended ambient temperature for all your rack
mounted devices.
• Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Ensure that air
flow is not blocked or reduced on any side of the unit.
• Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply
circuit so that overloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply wiring
or overcurrent protection. To provide the correct power connection to a rack,
refer to the rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine the
total power requirement of the supply circuit.
• (For sliding drawers) Do not pull out or install any drawer or feature if the rack
stabilizer brackets are not attached to the rack. Do not pull out more than one
drawer at a time. The rack may become unstable if you pull out more than one
drawer at a time.
• (For fixed drawers) This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moved for
servicing unless specified by the manufacturer. Attempting to move the drawer
partially or completely out of the rack may cause the rack to become unstable or
cause the drawer to fall out of the rack.

(R001)

Safety and Environmental Notices xv

 CAUTION:
Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves rack
stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever you relocate
a populated rack cabinet within a room or building:
• Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at the top
of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration
of the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration is not known, you
must do the following:
– Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.
– Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack
cabinet.
– Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices installed in the rack
cabinet below the 32U level.
• If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets, detach the
rack cabinet from the suite.
• Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate potential hazards.
• Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded rack
cabinet. Refer to the documentation that comes with your rack cabinet for the
weight of a loaded rack cabinet.
• Verify that all door openings are at least 762 x 2032 mm (30 x 80 in.).
• Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.
• Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.
• Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinet during
movement.
• Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees.
• Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the following:
– Lower the four leveling pads.
– Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
– If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack cabinet
from the lowest position to the highest position.
• If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the
configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rack cabinet in the
original packaging material, or equivalent. Also lower the leveling pads to raise
the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet.

(R002)

Power Cords
To avoid electrical shock, a power cord with a grounded attachment plug has been
provided. Use only properly grounded outlets.

All power cords use an appliance coupler that complies with the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard 320, Sheet C13.

If the power cord that you receive does not match your receptacle, contact your local
dealer.

Power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter’s
Laboratories (UL), are certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and
comply with the plug standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA).

xvi TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Product Recycling and Disposal
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national
regulations. IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. IBM offers a variety
of product return programs and services in several countries to assist equipment
owners in recycling their IT products. Information on IBM product recycling offerings
can be found on IBM’s Internet site at http://www.ibm.com/ibm/recycle/us/
index.shtml and http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/index.shtml.

Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la

normativa nacional o local aplicable. IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos
de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos
cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. IBM dispone de una serie de programas y servicios
de devolución de productos en varios países, a fin de ayudar a los propietarios de
equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar información sobre las
ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio web de IBM http://www.ibm.com/
ibm/environment/products/index.shtml.

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and
Norway.

Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC

concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive
determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as
applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products
to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end
of life per this Directive.

Remarque: Cette marque s'applique uniquement aux pays de l'Union Européenne et

à la Norvège.

L'etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de

Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les
dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers
l'Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette précise que le
produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin de
vie.

Safety and Environmental Notices xvii

 In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic equipment
(EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or recovered at end of
life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive, as
shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but
use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling and
recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential
effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of
hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and treatment, contact your local
IBM representative.

Battery Return Program

This product may contain sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,
lithium, or a lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual for
specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For information on disposal of
batteries outside the United States, go to http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/
products/index.shtml or contact your local waste disposal facility.

In the United States, IBM has established a return process for reuse, recycling, or
proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,
and other battery packs from IBM Equipment. For information on proper disposal of
these batteries, contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please have the IBM part number listed
on the battery available prior to your call.

For the European Union:

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and
Norway.

For Taiwan:

Please recycle batteries.

Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive
2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and
accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of
used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This
label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown
away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.

xviii TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformémentaux directives
européennes 2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs en usage et
aux batteries et accumulateurs usés. Les directives déterminent la marche à suivre en
vigueur dans l'Union Européenne pour le retour et le recyclage des batteries et
accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses batteries pour indiquer
que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt récupérée en fin de cycle de
vie selon cette norme.

In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators

are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of
life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal
concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users of
batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers
for the return, recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer
participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and
accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of
hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, contact your local IBM
representative.

This notice is provided in accordance with Royal Decree 106/2008 of Spain:

The retail price of batteries, accumulators, and power cells includes the cost of the
environmental management of their waste.

Perchlorate Material — California:

Special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/ for more information.

The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations

Title 22, Division 4.5 Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate
Materials. This product, part, or both may include a lithium manganese dioxide
battery which contains a perchlorate substance.

Safety and Environmental Notices xix

xx TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Preface
This manual contains information and instructions necessary for the setup, operation,
and servicing of the IBM® System Storage™ TS2900 Tape Autoloader (Machine Type
3572).

Related Publications
Refer to the following publications for additional information. To ensure that you
have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/.
• IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Installation Quick Reference (GA76-0423)
provides hardware installation instructions.
• IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader SCSI Reference (GC27-2211) provides
information on the SCSI commands supported by this library.
• IBM Tape Device Driver Installation and User’s Guide (GA32-0430) provides
instructions for attaching IBM-supported hardware to open-systems operating
systems. It indicates what devices and levels of operating systems are supported. It
also gives requirements for adapter cards, and tells how to configure hosts to use
the device driver. All of the above are with the Ultrium family of devices.
• IBM Tape Device Driver Programming Reference (GC35- 0483) supplies information to
application owners who want to integrate their open-systems applications with
IBM-supported Ultrium hardware. The reference contains information about the
application programming interfaces (APIs) for each of the various supported
operating system environments.
• IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference (GA32-0450) provides SCSI
supported commands and protocol governing the behavior of the SCSI interface.
• IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform: Quick Start Guide
(GA76-0420) gets you started with a basic configuration for encryption on LTO 4
tape drives.*
• IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform: Introduction, Planning
and User’s Guide (GA76-0418) contains information to help you install, configure,
and use the IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform.*

* This publication is not distributed in printed form. To get the latest version of this
publication in PDF format, please visit http://www.ibm.com/support/documentation/
us/en, enter “Encryption Key Manager” in the Search across document types… field,
click the search icon, and scroll down to the publication title. You can also go to
http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/publications/servlet/pbi.wss?CTY+US/ and
search for the publication form number or title.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 xxi

xxii TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 1. Product Description

“Front Panel” on page 1-2

“Cartridge Magazine” on page 1-3
“Rear Panel” on page 1-4
“Bar Code Reader” on page 1-5
“SAS Host Interface” on page 1-5
“Encryption” on page 1-5
“Supported Internet Protocols” on page 1-6
“SNMP Messaging” on page 1-6
“Network Time Protocol (NTP)” on page 1-7
“Ultrium Tape Drives” on page 1-7
“Media” on page 1-8
“Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning” on page 1-8
“Location Coordinates and Element Addresses” on page 1-8
“Library Specifications” on page 1-9
“Product Environment” on page 1-10
“Supported Servers, Operating Systems, and Software” on page 1-11
“Supported Device Drivers” on page 1-11

a29z0033

Figure 1-1. TS2900 Tape Autoloader

The IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader (Machine Type 3572) provides
compact, high-capacity, low-cost solutions for simple, unattended data backup. The
library has a compact 1U form factor with easy access to tape cartridges via a
removable magazine. The TS2900 Tape Autoloader is an external stand-alone or
rack-mountable unit that incorporates an IBM Ultrium 4 Half-High Tape Drive
(Model S4H) or an IBM Ultrium 3 Half-High Tape Drive (Model S3H). It is equipped
with a SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) host adapter attachment that has a data transfer
rate of up to 3.0 Gbps.

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader has a 10-position removable cartridge magazine,

providing a maximum of 9 data cartridge positions, or a maximum of 8 data cartridge
positions with a configurable 1-slot I/O Station. One position is reserved as the tape
drive exchange position and can be accessed by the library only. Tape cartridges
supported in the TS2900 Tape Autoloader include the 800 GB native physical capacity

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 1-1

 IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge (Ultrium 4), 400 GB Tape Cartridge (Ultrium 3),
200 GB Tape Cartridge (Ultrium 2), 100 GB Tape Cartridge (Ultrium 1), and WORM
(Ultrium 4 and Ultrium 3). The library data storage capacity can be further increased
using hardware compression.

Table 1-1. Data capacity and recording format

Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format
Ultrium 4 800 GB (1600 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 896 tracks,
sixteen tracks at a time.
Ultrium 3 400 GB (800 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 704 tracks,
sixteen tracks at a time.
Ultrium 2 200 GB (400 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 512 tracks,
eight tracks at a time.
Ultrium 1 100 GB (200 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 384 tracks,
eight tracks at a time.

Front Panel

a29z0002
5 6 3 6 4 1 2

Figure 1-2. Front panel components

Table 1-2. Front panel component descriptions

Number Component Description
1 Operator Panel The Operator Panel features a monochrome 16-character LCD graphic
display located on the front of the library. Library operations and
service functions are performed from this screen.
The Web User Interface offers some of the same functionality as the
Operator Panel using a web browser for remote access to the library. For
more information on the Operator Panel and the Web User Interface, see
Chapter 2, “User Interfaces,” on page 2-1.
2 Control keys The control keys are located to the right of the Operator Panel LCD
display on the front of the library.
3 Cartridge magazine The tape library has a single cartridge magazine that can hold up to 9
data cartridges, or 8 data cartridges with a 1-slot I/O Station. See
Figure 1-3 on page 1-3.
Column 5/Tier 1 in the cartridge magazine can be configured as a 1-slot
I/O Station. Column 5/Tier 2 in the cartridge magazine is reserved for
the exchange position and can be accessed by the library only. The I/O
Station is used to import and export cartridges without interrupting
normal library operation. Beginning with Column 4, a minimum of one
column can be reserved for cleaning cartridges. Cleaning cartridges are
used to clean the tape drive heads. For configuration details, see
“Physical Library Settings” on page 3-19.

1-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table 1-2. Front panel component descriptions (continued)
Number Component Description
4 Cartridge magazine release Emergency cartridge magazine lock release. When the I/O Station is
locked, insert a large, straightened paper clip twice or hold the paper
clip in place while sliding the cartridge magazine past the I/O Station
lock.
5 Serial number label The machine type and serial number of the library are located on the
front bezel of the library. The serial number is the number that links the
library to IBM entitlement for service.
6 Air vents These vents draw cooler air into the library enclosure and allow warm
air to escape which helps keep the library at a normal operating
temperature.

Cartridge Magazine

r 1
ie n
T um
2
l
o
C

r 1
ie n
r 2

T um
1
ie n
T um

l
2

o
C
l
o
C

r 2
ie n
r 3

T um
ie n

1
T um
2

l
o
C
l
o
C

r 3
ie n
r 4

T um
1
ie n
T um

l
2

o
C
l
o
C

r 4
ie n
r 5

T um
1
ie n
T um

l
2

o
C
l
o
C

r 5
ie n
T um
1

2
l
o
C

a29z0025
3

Figure 1-3. Cartridge magazine

1 Cartridge locations as they appear in 2 Cartridge magazine

the Library Map. Magazine handle
3
Note: These labels are for reference
only and do not appear on the
magazine.

Figure 1-4 shows the cartridge location label 1 and ruler 2 that appear on the
cartridge magazine. The ruler provides an indication of the distance, when opening
or withdrawing the magazine, to the end of the magazine before it clears the front
edge of the library.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-3

 1 2

a29z0057
Figure 1-4. Cartridge magazine (top view)

Rear Panel
3

a29z0003

5 4 1 2 6

Figure 1-5. Rear panel components

Table 1-3. Rear panel component descriptions

Number Component Description
1 Power connector The library connects to a 110/220 volt ac power supply.

2 Power switch The library is powered ON when the power supply switch on the rear
panel is ON (|); the library has no independent power switch on the
front panel.
3 SAS host interface connector Serial-attached SCSI host interface cable connection. The Ultrium 3 and
Ultrium 4 SAS drives use the SFF-8088 connection at the drive end and
SFF-8088 or SFF-8470 at the host adapter end.
4 Ethernet port This port is used to connect the library to a network.

1-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table 1-3. Rear panel component descriptions (continued)
Number Component Description
5 Accessor locking screw The Accessor locking screw is used to lock the accessor in place during
transportation.
Important: Remove the Accessor locking screw before powering ON the
library.
6 Air vent These vents allow air to escape from the power supply and tape drive
sled.

Bar Code Reader

The bar code reader is an integral part of the library Accessor. The bar code reader
reads each cartridge bar code label that identify the types of cartridge magazines and
tape drive installed in the library and provides inventory feedback to the host
application, Operator Panel, and Web User Interface. The library stores the
customized inventory data in memory. Library firmware supports a 6 or 8-character
volume serial number (VOLSER) on the bar code label on the tape cartridge.

SAS Host Interface

The Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Half-High Tape Drives support the Serial Attached SCSI
(SAS) interface. They both have one Mini-SAS (SFF-8088) connector, and can be
connected to a Mini-SAS (SFF-8088) or SAS (SFF-8470) at the host adapter end with
the appropriate cable.

A drive with a SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) interface can be linked directly to
controllers. SAS is a performance improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS
enables multiple devices (up to 128) of different sizes and types to be connected
simultaneously with thinner and longer cables; its full-duplex signal transmission
supports 3.0 Gb/s. In addition, the TS2900 Tape Autoloader can be hot-plugged. SAS
drives will auto-negotiate speed.

Encryption
The LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive supports host Application Managed Encryption
(AME), Library Managed Encryption (LME), and System Managed Encryption
(SME). Data encryption is supported by the LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Drive (3572-S4H)
only; the Ultrium 3 Tape Drive (3572-S3H) does not support encryption.

Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a key. Library
Managed Encryption (LME) and System Managed Encryption (SME) require a
license key which is available by purchasing Feature Code 5901.

The encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to
encrypt and decrypt host tape application data.

The encryption-capable library firmware allows the user to select “None” or

“Application Managed Encryption” from the Web User Interface. If a valid
Transparent Encryption license key has been previously entered, “System Managed
Encryption” or “Library Managed Encryption” can also be selected. The factory
default is “None.”

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-5

 For more details, refer to the IBM Encryption Key Manager Installation, Planning, and
User’s Guide. See “Related Publications” on page xxi.

Supported Internet Protocols

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the following Internet protocols:
• IPv4
• IPv6

To learn more about IPv4, visit http://www.iana.org/. To learn more about IPv6, visit
http://www.ipv6.org/.

SNMP Messaging
Occasionally, the library may encounter a situation that you want to know about,
such as an open magazine or a fault that causes the library to stop. The library
provides a standard TCP/IP protocol called Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) to send alerts about conditions (such as need for operator intervention) over
a TCP/IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring station. These alerts are called
SNMP traps. Using the information supplied in each SNMP trap, the monitoring
station (together with customer-supplied software) can alert operations personnel of
possible problems or operator interventions that occur.

SNMP Traps
SNMP Traps are alerts or status messages that can be collected, monitored and used
to proactively manage attached libraries using SNMP protocol with the SNMP
monitoring station(s). In summary, each trap provides the following information:
• Product Identification such as product name, description, manufacturer, model
number, firmware level, and the URL that the trap is designated for.
• Product Status such as the severity of the trap, status (current and previous) and
the time the trap occurred.
• Library State (physical device status) such as identification and status of devices
that are monitored. In the case of the library, it would include enclosure, power
supply, controller, magazine status, drive count, cartridge slot count, and I/O
station count. Also included would be certain library statistics, and where
appropriate, the fault FSC (fault symptom code) including the severity and
description of that fault.
• Drive Status such as the identification of each drive in the library, firmware level,
serial number and other address and status information.
• Trap Definitions such as library status change, open magazine, I/O accessed, hard
fault information, drive cleaning requests, excessive retries and library returning to
normal operations.
• SNMP MIBs: The library’s Management Information Base (MIB) contains units of
information that specifically describe an aspect of the system, such as the system
name, hardware number or communications configuration. When using SNMP to
monitor your TS2900 Tape Autoloader, make sure that the IBM TS2900 MIB file is
loaded on your SNMP monitoring station. SNMP traps will be sent to the SNMP
monitoring station(s) that are defined for your library (see “Configuring SNMP
Trap Notifications” on page 4-27). Download the SNMP MIB file for this library
from http://www.ibm.com/storage/support.

1-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Network Time Protocol (NTP)
NTP is an Internet standard protocol that assures accurate synchronization of
computer clock times in a network of computers. Running as a continuous
background client program on a computer, NTP sends periodic time requests to a
server, obtaining server time stamps, and using them to adjust the client’s clock.

Ultrium Tape Drives

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the Ultrium 3 (3572-3SH) and Ultrium 4
(3572-S4H) Half-High Tape Drives.

The Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Half-High Tape Drives support the Serial Attached SCSI
(SAS) interface. They both have one Mini-SAS (SFF-8088) connector.

a80hh015

Figure 1-6. Ultrium Half-High Tape Drive

Speed Matching
To improve system performance, the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drives use a
technique called speed matching to dynamically adjust its native (uncompressed)
data rate to the slower data rate of the attached server.

Channel Calibration
The channel calibration feature of the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drives
customizes each read/write data channel for optimum performance. The
customization enables compensation for variations in the recording channel transfer
function, media characteristics, and read/write head characteristics.

Power Management
The Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drives feature a power management function that
controls the drive’s electronics so that part of the electronics completely turn OFF
when circuit functions are not needed for the drive’s operation.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-7

Media
The TS2900 Tape Autoloader uses Ultrium Tape Cartridges that provide up to 800 GB
native capacity (up to 1600 GB with 2:1 hardware data compression) for Ultrium 4
tape drives, and up to 400 GB native capacity (up to 800 GB with 2:1 hardware
compression) for Ultrium 3 tape drives.

Table 1-4. Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive
IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges
IBM Ultrium
Tape Drive 800 GB 400 GB 200GB 100GB
(Ultrium 4) (Ultrium 3) (Ultrium 2) (Ultrium 1)
Ultrium 4 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Ultrium 3 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Ultrium 2 Read/Write Read/Write
Ultrium 1 Read/Write

Note: The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the Ultrium 3 (3572-3SH) and Ultrium 4
(3572-4SH) Tape Drives only.

For more detailed information, see Chapter 5, “Media,” on page 5-1.

Logical Unit Number (LUN) Scanning

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader uses a single SCSI ID and dual LUNs to control the tape
drive (LUN 0) and library accessor (LUN 1). The library requires a Host Bus Adapter
(HBA) that supports LUN scanning. If it is not enabled, your host system will not
scan beyond LUN 0 and will fail to detect the library. It will only see the tape drive.

Important: Some HBAs, such as RAID controllers, do not support LUN scanning.

Location Coordinates and Element Addresses

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader incorporates IBM’s patented high-density (HD) slot
technology, which allows multiple cartridges to be stored in a tiered architecture. The
depth of a cartridge location in a high-density slot is known as a tier. High-density
slots are designed to contain multiple cartridges in Tiers 1 and 2.

Note: Each column has a spring-loaded mechanism that pushes a tape cartridge into
Tier 1 when it is the only cartridge in that column. A single cartridge in a
column takes on the Tier 2 element address even though it is physically
located in Tier 1.

1-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Front Rear

Reserved slot

Column 5 Column 4 Column 3 Column 2 Column 1

Tier 2 Tier 2 Tier 2 Tier 2 Tier 2

Column 5 Column 4 Column 3 Column 2 Column 1 Drive

Tier 1 Tier 1 Tier 1 Tier 1 Tier 1

Accessor

a29z0001
Figure 1-7. Location coordinates
A storage element address is assigned to each cartridge at the time the cartridge is
inserted. Storage element addresses range from 4097 to 4105 (0x1001 to 0x1009) when
the I/O Station is not enabled, and from 4097 to 4104 (0x1001 to 0x1008) when the I/O
Station is enabled.

Library Specifications

Table 1-5. Physical specifications

Parameter Measurement
Front panel width (chassis/bezel) 445 mm (17.52 in.)/483 mm (19.02 in.)
Depth 850 mm (33.46 in.)
Height 44 mm (1.73 in.)
Weight (library only) 13 kg (28.66 lbs)

Table 1-6. Electrical specifications

Parameter Measurement
Voltage 100 to 240 Vac. (4.0 to 1.5 A)
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption 110 W

For additional information about installation specifications, see “Choosing a

Location” on page 3-2.

Table 1-7. Environmental specifications

Parameter Operating (see Note) Storage Shipping
10 to 38 °C 1 to 60 °C -40 to 60 °C
Temperature
(50 to 100 °F) (34 to 140 °F) (-40 to 140 °F)
Temperature variation 10 °C/hour (max) 10 °C/hour (max) 10 °C/hour (max)
Relative humidity 20 to 80% 10 to 90% 10 to 90%
Wet bulb temperature 26 °C (78.8 °F) max. 29 °C (84 °F) max. 29 °C (84 °F) max.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-9

 Table 1-7. Environmental specifications (continued)
Parameter Operating (see Note) Storage Shipping
Altitude (meters) 0 to 2,500 0 to 2,500 0 to 2,500
Note: The operating environment of the library must not conflict with the media storage
requirements. The library may be capable of operating at elevated temperatures for an
extended period, however, the temperature could shorten the useful life of media that is
stored in the library. If media is stored in the library for more than 10 hours, the storage
temperature requirements for media should be met. It should be assumed that media stored
in the library is approximately 2 degrees above ambient temperature when the library is
powered ON.

Table 1-8. Operational specifications

Parameter Model S4H Model 3SH
Maximum storage capacity 7.2 TB (14.4 TB with 2:1 compression)
Maximum number of data cartridges 9 (including an optional I/O Station)
Drive types Ultrium 4 Half High Ultrium 3 Half High
120 MB/s (240 MB/s 60 MB/s (120 MB/s
Sustained native data transfer rate
with 2:1 compression) with 2:1 compression)
Interface 3 Gb/s SAS

Table 1-9. Acoustical specifications

Parameter Measurement
Idling acoustical noise sound power level
6.6
LwAD in Bels (1 Bel = 10 dB)
Maximum acoustical noise sound power level
6.8
LwAD in Bels (1 Bel = 10 dB)

Product Environment
The TS2900 Tape Autoloader is designed to operate in a general business
environment.

The library meets the acoustical requirements for general business area category 2D.
Category 2D states that the library should be installed a minimum of 4 m (13 ft.) from
a permanent work station.

To allow for service access, install the library a minimum of 0.9 m (3 ft.) from all
obstacles.

The library is a precision computer peripheral. To ensure maximum longevity of your

library, locate the library away from dust, dirt, and airborne particulates:
• Keep the library away from high-traffic areas, especially if the floor is carpeted.
Carpeting harbors dust and people walking on the carpet can cause the carpet
fibers and the dust to become airborne.
• Keep the library out of printer/copier rooms because of toner and paper dust.
Additionally, do not store paper supplies next to the library.
• Keep the library away from moving air caused by doorways, open windows, fans,
and air conditioners.

1-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Ensure that the machine covers are always kept closed to minimize any
contamination from airborne particles.

Supported Servers, Operating Systems, and Software

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader is supported by a wide variety of servers (hosts),
operating systems, and adapters. These attachments can change throughout the life
cycle of the product.

To determine the latest supported attachments:

1. Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/.
2. Point cursor at Support & downloads, then Support by product, then point and
click System storage.
3. Select the appropriate Interoperability link.

Supported Device Drivers

IBM maintains the latest levels of device drivers and driver documentation for the
library on the Internet. You can use one of the following procedures to access this
material. (Note: If you do not have Internet access and you need information about
device drivers, contact your Marketing Representative.)

• Using a browser, type one of the following:

– http://www.ibm.com/storage/lto
– ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/devdrvr

• Using File Transfer Protocol (FTP), enter the following specifications:

– FTP site: ftp.software.ibm.com
– IP Address: 207.25.253.26
– User ID: anonymous
– Password: (use your current e-mail address)
– Directory: /storage/devdrvr

IBM provides Portable Document Format (.pdf) and Postscript (.ps) versions of its
device driver documentation in the /storage/devdrvr/Doc directory:
• IBM_Tape_IUG.pdf and IBM_Tape_IUG.ps contain the current version of the IBM
Tape Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guide.
• IBM_Tape_PROGREF.pdf and IBM_Tape_PROGREF.ps contain the current version
of the IBM Tape Device Drivers Programming Reference.

A list of device drivers for each supported server appears at /storage/devdrvr/.

Note: The device driver for System i™ servers is included in the i5/OS® operating
system.

Chapter 1. Product Description 1-11

1-12 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 2. User Interfaces

“Operator Panel” on page 2-1

“Web User Interface” on page 2-5

The library has a local interface, the Operator Panel, and a remote Web User Interface
(UI).

The Operator Panel is located on the front of the library and allows users to work
locally on the library. The Web User Interface allows users and administrators to view
and perform some library functions from remote sites.

The Web User Interface is implemented as a Java Applet that runs in a web browser
from any PC on the network. The Java Applet requires that Java 1.5.0 or higher be
installed on your host computer for full functionality, and is best viewed using
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher. Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher is required for IPv6.

Operator Panel
The Operator Panel is located on the front bezel of the library. The Operator Panel
displays library information and menu commands used to execute library
management functions in response to the control keys located on the right of the LCD
display.

6 7 8 9 2 4
a29z0004

1 3 5

Figure 2-1. Operator Panel components

Table 2-1. Operator Panel component descriptions

Number Component Description
1 LCD display 16-character LCD graphic display

2 Plus key (+) Button used to navigate upward (↑) through the menu items

3 Minus key (−) Button used to navigate downward (↓) through the menu items

4 Cancel key (×) Button used to cancel a user action and return to the last menu item

5 Enter key (↵) Button used to display a submenu or to select a user action

6 Ready/Activity LED Green LED lit when the unit is powered ON. The LED flashes when
there is any library activity or the library is offline.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 2-1

Table 2-1. Operator Panel component descriptions (continued)
Number Component Description
7 Clean Drive LED Amber LED lit when the drive needs cleaning. The LED turns OFF after
the drive is cleaned successfully.
8 Attention LED Amber LED lit when a cartridge is bad, marginal, or invalid. The LED
turns OFF when the media is removed from the drive. The LED may
also be lit when there is a power supply problem.
9 Error LED Amber LED lit when there is an unrecoverable library or drive failure.
The corresponding error message appears on the LCD display.

The Operator Panel operates in two basic modes.

• User Interaction mode – Mode employed when a user is pushing keys on the
Operator Panel.
• System Driven mode – Normal mode of operation where the Operator Panel
displays status in response to commands issued from the drive’s internal interface.

When an Operator Panel key is pressed and released, the Operator Panel
automatically transitions to User Interaction mode. User Interaction mode will
continue until 3 minutes after a user stops pushing keys, or the requested accessor
action stops, whichever is longer, then the Operator Panel returns to System Driven
mode.

If necessary, the Operator Panel will automatically transition to System Driven mode.
When this occurs, the library remembers what the user was doing before the display
mode changed.

Any operational conflict between commands received over the host interface or the
Web User Interface and those entered via the Operator Panel are avoided with a
reservation mechanism on a first-come, first-served basis. Operator Panel commands
are canceled by an Operator Panel logout or timeout.

Library firmware will not allow a user to select an impossible request. Those
situations will include, but are not limited to:
• Moving a cartridge from any source to a position occupied by another cartridge
• Moving a cartridge from an empty cartridge position
• Loading a cartridge from any source to a full drive
• Unloading a cartridge from an empty drive

Any error detected by the library or drive controller and not recoverable through
predetermined firmware algorithms is considered fatal. When an error occurs, an
error code is displayed on the Operator Panel display and the error LED is ON. The
error code remains on the Operator Panel until a key is pressed, which causes the
Operator Panel to return to the Home Screen. Numeric error codes are used for
unrecoverable fatal errors, otherwise text status messages are displayed.

When the library powers ON or resets, it goes through several internally controlled
initialization processes, called the Power-On-Self-Test (POST).

Front Panel LEDs

All LEDs are updated during power ON and reset sequences. At power ON or
software reset, all LEDs turn ON as soon as POST allows. When initialization starts,
all LEDs turn OFF and the Ready/Activity LED flashes at a rate of approximately two

2-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 seconds per cycle. When the mechanical initialization is complete, the
Ready/Activity LED stops flashing and turns ON.

If a library failure occurs, the Ready/Activity LED turns OFF and the Error LED turns
ON. The Operator Panel also displays an appropriate error code to help identify the
failure.

The following are additional operational details of LEDs:

• The Ready/Activity LED ( 6 in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1) turns ON any time the unit
is powered ON and functional. The Ready/Activity LED flashes whenever there is
library or drive activity. This LED also flashes when the library is offline.
• The Clean Drive LED ( 7 in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1) turns ON when a “cleaning
required” command is issued by the drive. The LED turns OFF after a successful
drive cleaning operation.
• The Attention LED ( 8 in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1) turns ON to indicate that there is
a piece of media which is bad/marginal, or invalid. The LED turns OFF when all
marginal and invalid cartridges have been exported from the library. The Attention
LED also turns ON if Autoclean is enabled and no cleaning cartridge is in a
cleaning position.
• The Error LED ( 9 in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1) turns ON when there is an
unrecoverable drive or library failure. An error message is displayed on the screen
and the LED remains ON until the error state is resolved.

For more information, see “Interpreting Front Panel LEDs” on page 6-8.

Input Modes
There are several ways to enter values in the different menu items. These values are
selectable predefined values, toggle values (for example, ON/OFF) and numerical
values like network addresses.

Selecting Predefined Values

1. To set the predefined values, press the Enter key to select the menu item.
2. Using the Plus and Minus keys, select one of the various predefined values for
that item.
3. As soon as the Operator Panel display shows the correct value, press the Enter
key to apply the value.

Toggling Values
Toggle values are used to switch between two different states like ON and OFF.
1. After navigating to the menu item, press the Enter key to select the menu item.
2. Using the Plus and Minus keys, select one of the various predefined states for
that item.
3. Press the Enter key to apply the new state.

Entering Numerical Values

Numerical values are needed for network addresses, password entries and other
configuration entries.
1. After navigating to the menu item, the current value is displayed and the cursor
highlights the first digit of the value that can be changed.
2. For each digit to be changed in the value:
a. Use the Plus and Minus keys to increment/decrement the digit.

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-3

 b. Press the Enter key to highlight the next editable digit.
3. Press the Enter key at the last digit to apply the complete entry, or press the
Cancel key to cancel the whole edit process and maintain the original value.

Logging in
At power ON or software reset, the library ready screen appears when POST
initialization completes successfully.

a29z0028
Figure 2-2. Library ready screen
To log in to the Operator Panel, press the Enter key. The password entry screen
appears.

a29z0029
Figure 2-3. Password entry screen

Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to change the current digit. Press the Enter key
to advance to the next digit. The default password is 0000. Once you have logged in,
you can change the password using the Change Login Password command. See
“Configuring Operator Panel Settings” on page 4-11.

Screen Elements

1 2
a29z0030

Figure 2-4. Screen elements

The Operator Panel display a single menu item ( 1 in Figure 2-4) on each screen. The
existence of other menu items above and below the currently displayed item is
indicated by the arrows ( 2 in Figure 2-4) on the right side of the screen.

In the Configuration menu, the current configuration setting is indicated by an

asterisk ( 3 in Figure 2-4) on the right side of the screen. For example, in Figure 2-4,
the I/O Station is currently enabled. When changing a configuration setting, the
confirmation screen in Figure 2-5 appears. Press the Enter key to confirm, or Cancel to
return to the previous screen.

2-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 a29z0032
Figure 2-5. Confirmation screen

Web User Interface

The Web User Interface Java Applet requires Java 1.5.0 or higher be installed on your
host computer for full functionality, and is best viewed using Internet Explorer 6.0 or
higher. Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher is required for IPv6. If your computer does not
have Java installed or you need to upgrade your installation, download the latest
version of the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) for your platform from
http://www.java.com/ and follow the instructions provided to enable and configure
the Java Runtime Environment for your browser.

The Web User Interface can also be used to update the library and drive firmware,
and to download error logs, drive dumps, and other library data from the library.

Before the TS2900 Tape Autoloader can be managed over a network using the Web
User Interface, you must set up the initial network configuration of the library using
the Operator Panel. For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings” on
page 3-29.

Logging in
To log in to the Web User Interface from Internet Explorer, you need to enter the IP
address of the library. The IP address can be obtained using the View Settings
command from the Operator Panel. For example, http://192.168.1.1

When the applet launches, the following warning message appears. This message is
normal and does not indicate a problem.
a29z0160

Figure 2-6. Java security warning message

You can click the Always trust content from this publisher check box to avoid the
warning message in subsequent browser sessions.

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-5

 After launching the Web User Interface, the login window is displayed.

a29z0095
Figure 2-7. Login window
The factory default account login and password for an Administrator account is:
• Account: admin
• Password: secure

The account name and password are case sensitive. After entering your account name
and password, use your mouse to click Login or press the Enter key.

For information on account privileges, see “User Privileges” on page 2-8.

Common Header Elements

All Web User Interface windows (except for the Login screen) contain the following
common elements in the header:
• Help — Click to read context-sensitive help for the associated page.
• Logoff — Click to log out of the Web User Interface.

2-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Menus Available from the Web User Interface
Figure 2-8 shows the Web User Interface window for a User account, Figure 2-9
shows the window for a Superuser account, and Figure 2-10 shows the window for an
Administrator account.

a29z0096
Figure 2-8. User account window

a29z0173

Figure 2-9. Superuser account window

Chapter 2. User Interfaces 2-7

 a29z0097
Figure 2-10. Administrator account window
For a complete description of all Web User Interface menu options, see Chapter 4,
“Operations,” on page 4-1.

User Privileges
User privilege levels are manually assigned to user accounts created within the
library. Controlling access to screens and operations within the library preserves the
integrity of the library and the data that is stored within the library.

There are three types of user privileges in the library.

• Users are allowed to monitor the library, but not perform actions that affect the
physical library.
• Superusers are allowed to operate the physical and logical library, but not perform
actions that affect the library configuration.
• Administrator users are allowed access to the entire physical library and logical
library, including configuration. One and only one administrator user must be
assigned the login name admin.

User privileges include:

• Multiple users can be logged in at one time on the Web User Interface.
• Any user can be logged in to only one interface at a time.

For a comparison of user privileges, see “User Privilege Comparison” on page A-3.

2-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration

“Verifying the Shipment” on page 3-1

“Choosing a Location” on page 3-2
Installing Your Library “Installing the Deskside Cover” on page 3-2
“Installing in a Rack” on page 3-5
“Removing the Accessor Locking4Screw” on page 3-12
“Attaching the Library to a Server” on page 3-13
“Configuring Your Library using “Logging in to the Web User Interface” on page 3-17
the Web User Interface” on “Checking Firmware Level” on page 3-18
page 3-16
“Configuring Library Settings” on page 3-18
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 3-20
“Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page 3-21
“Configuring Encryption Settings” on page 3-22
“Configuring E-mail Notifications” on page 3-24
“Configuring Trap Notifications” on page 3-25
“Managing User Access” on page 3-27
“Saving the Library Configuration” on page 3-28
“Configuring Your Library using “Logging in to the Operator Panel” on page 3-28
the Operator Panel” on page 3-28 “Configuring Network Settings” on page 3-29
“Configuring Library Settings” on page 3-30
“Populating the Library with Cartridges” on page 3-31
“Verifying Library and Drive Operation” on page 3-32
“Taking the Library Online” on page 3-33
“Registering for My Notification” on page 3-33

To install and configure a desktop or rack-mounted TS2900 Tape Autoloader, perform

the procedures in this chapter in the order they are presented.

Verifying the Shipment

Verify that the following items are included in the library shipment:
• Power cord
• IBM Translated Safety Notices
• Safety notices pointer sheet (pointing to the CD-ROM)
• Quick Reference
• Setup, Operator, and Service guide CD-ROM
• Warranty information
• Device driver pointer sheet (pointing to the Internet)
• Quality Hotline card
• Rack mount kit or Deskside kit
• SAS wrap tool
• Optional transparent LTO encryption information

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 3-1

 The following additional items are required for installation and library operation:
• SAS cable
• Data cartridges
• Cleaning cartridge
• Ethernet cable

Important: If any of the contents of your shipment are damaged or missing, please
call the appropriate number listed on the Quality Hotline card.

Choosing a Location
Choose a location that meets the following criteria:

Table 3-1. Location criteria

Criteria Definition
Room temperature 16 to 32 °C (60 to 90 °F)
Voltage 100 to 240 Vac. (4.0 to 1.5 A)
Note that the power switch is located on the rear of the library and
must be easily accessible at all times.
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Relative humidity 20 to 80% non-condensing
Air quality The library should be placed in an area with minimal sources of
particulate contamination. Avoid areas near frequently used doors and
walkways, stacks of supplies that collect dust, printers, and
smoke-filled rooms. Excessive dust and debris can damage cartridges
and the tape drive.
Clearance • Back: Minimum of 15 cm (6 in.)
• Front: Minimum of 30 cm (12 in.)
• Sides: Minimum of 5 cm (2 in.)
Rack requirements Standard EIA 19-inch rack: 1U space

Installing the Deskside Cover

A deskside cover and six feet must be installed on the library chassis before the
library can be used as a desktop unit. If you intend to install the library in a rack, skip
this step and proceed to “Installing in a Rack” on page 3-5.

Table 3-2 lists the parts in the deskside assembly kit. A Phillips head screwdriver
(preferably with a magnetic head) will be needed to assemble the deskside kit.

Table 3-2. Deskside kit

Number Part Number Quantity Description Part
a29z0034

1 45E3240 6 1U desktop foot

3-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table 3-2. Deskside kit (continued)
Number Part Number Quantity Description Part

a29z0035
2 45E3798 1 Deskside cover

3 45E3799 1 Bracket, 1U library right rail

a29z0036
Screw, cross-recessed binding

a29z0037
4 45E3749 2 head, M4x4 (for securing the rear
of the cover to the library)

5 45E3801 1 Bracket, 1U library left rail

a29z0038
Screw, cross-recessed flat head,
M3x6 (6 for securing left and right

a29z0039
6 45E3802 12
rails to library; 6 for securing sides
of cover to library)

To install the deskside cover on your library:

1. Verify that your deskside kit includes all the necessary contents. See Table 3-2.
2. Attach the left 5 and right 3 rails to the chassis using 3 flat-head screws 6 on
each side (Figure 3-1).

3
a29z0009

Figure 3-1. Attaching side rails to the library chassis

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-3

 3. Turn the library over and attach the feet 1 to the designated locations on the
bottom of the library (Figure 3-2). Return the library to the upright position.

a29z0013
Figure 3-2. Attaching the feet
4. Position the deskside cover 2 in the correct orientation over the library chassis
and attach the cover to the library using 3 flat-head screws 6 on each side
(Figure 3-3).

a29z0011

Figure 3-3. Attaching the cover to the library chassis (side screws)

3-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 5. Attach the deskside cover using the 2 large binding-head screws 4 on the rear of
the library (Figure 3-4).

a29z0012
Figure 3-4. Attaching the cover to the library chassis (rear screws)
6. Place the library in the desired desktop location.

Important: Do not place the library on its side. Do not stack objects on top of the
library.

Installing in a Rack
The TS2900 Tape Autoloader can be easily installed into a standard 19-inch rack
system. A standard 19-inch rack system contains multiple mounting locations called
EIA units as defined by the Electronics Industries Association. Each EIA unit contains
three square or round holes used to mount rack designed equipment. The library
requires 1 EIA unit (1U) of rack space. Each unit is separated by a small space.

Table 3-3 lists the parts in the rack mount assembly kit. A Phillips head screwdriver
(preferably with a magnetic head) will be needed to assemble the rack mount kit.

Table 3-3. Rack mount assembly kit

Number Part Number Quantity Description Part

1 45E3741 1 Left rear bracket

a29z0040

2 45E3742 1 Right rear bracket

a29z0041

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-5

Table 3-3. Rack mount assembly kit (continued)
Number Part Number Quantity Description Part

3 45E3743 1 Left front bracket

a29z0042
4 45E3744 1 Right front bracket

a29z0043
5 45E3745 1 Left front rail

a29z0044
6 45E3746 1 Right front rail

a29z0045
7 45E3747 2 Rear rail

a29z0046

Screw, cross-recessed flat head,

a29z0047

8 45E5909 4
M3x4

Screw, flat head, self locking,

a29z0048

9 45E3748 8
M6x10

Screw, cross-recessed binding

a29z0049

10 45E3749 6
head

3-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table 3-3. Rack mount assembly kit (continued)
Number Part Number Quantity Description Part

Screw, cross-recessed pan head,

a29z0050
11 45E3867 2
M6x10

12 07H6655 1 Hook and loop fastener strap

a29z0051

a29z0058
13 39M5378 1 Rack device to PDU line cord E

N L

When deciding on a location in your rack for the library, remember that the Operator
Panel has a small LCD screen and should be positioned to allow for easy viewing. The
rear of the library should be free from any obstructions to allow easy access to the
power switch and other rear panel components.

Note: Before beginning the rack installation of the library, read the safety
information in “Rack Safety” on page xv. Also, verify that no feet are attached
to the bottom of the library.

The library requires 1U rack space in an EIA standard sized rack. One unit (1U) of
vertical rack space is equal to 4.45 cm (1.75 in), and contains three holes with
equidistant centers of 1.59 cm (0.625 in.). The boundary between each 1U rack space is
identified by two holes separated by only 1.27 cm (0.5 in.).

To install the library in a rack:

1. Verify that your rack kit includes all the necessary contents. See Table 3-3.
2. Determine the location in your rack for your library to be installed and, using a
pencil, mark the location on the front vertical rails (Figure 3-5) and rear vertical
rails (Figure 3-6) in your rack.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-7

 a29z0014
Figure 3-5. Rack mount screw locations for front vertical rails

a29z0015

Figure 3-6. Rack mount screw locations for rear vertical rails
3. Attach the left 3 and right 4 (Figure 3-7) front brackets to the front of the library
chassis using two flat-head screws 8 on each side. Use the bottom two screw
holes on each side.

3-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 8
3

a29z0017
8

Figure 3-7. Attaching the front brackets to the library chassis

4. Attach the left 1 and right 2 rear brackets to the left 5 and right 6 front rails
using two round-head screws 10 on each side (Figure 3-8).

Note: Run the hook and loop fastener strap 12 through the slot on the right rear
bracket and attach it back upon itself.

1 12
2

10

5
a29z0019
6

Figure 3-8. Attaching the rear brackets to the rails

Important: Do NOT tighten these screws completely at this time.

5. Slide in the rear rails 7 from back to front, to create the rail assemblies. Ensure
the screw holes face outwards (Figure 3-9).

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-9

 7

a29z0018
Figure 3-9. Creating the rail assemblies
6. Install the rail assemblies into the rack (Figure 3-10). Ensure the three holes in the
front of the unit align with the 1U space marked on the vertical rails in Step 2.
Secure the rails to the rack using four flat-head screws 9 on each side of the rack.
Use both of the two screw locations on the rear of the rack rail (Figure 3-6). Use
the top and middle screw locations on the front of the rack rail (Figure 3-5).

9
a29z0020

Figure 3-10. Installing the rail assemblies

3-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 7. Slide the library chassis into the rack. Secure the front of the library to the rack
using the large black screws 11 in the bottom holes on each front bracket
(Figure 3-11).

11

a29z0021
Figure 3-11. Securing the front of the library in the rack
8. Secure the rear of the library to the rack using a round-head screw 10 on each rear
bracket (Figure 3-12). Tighten the other rear bracket screws to secure the library
to the rack.

10 10
a29z0022

Figure 3-12. Securing the rear of the library in the rack

9. Run the SAS cable, power cable, and Ethernet cable through the hook and loop
fastener strap 12 , leaving enough slack to reach the corresponding connectors,
then tighten the strap (Figure 3-13).

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-11

 12

a29z0023
Figure 3-13. The cables at the rear of the library

Note: For information about converting and relocating the library, see Chapter 8,
“Removal and Replacement Procedures,” on page 8-1.

Removing the Accessor Locking Screw

Important: The Accessor locking screw prevents the library Accessor from moving
during shipment and must be removed before the library is powered
ON.

To remove the Accessor locking screw, unscrew the Accessor locking screw ( 1 in
Figure 3-14) that is attached to a label and is fastened in place on the rear panel of the
library.
a29z0102

Figure 3-14. Accessor locking screw

3-12 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Attaching the Library to a Server
The drive is attached to a server using the Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) interface and
the Web User Interface accesses the library using an Ethernet interface.

Connecting the Host Interface Cables

To connect the host interface cable to the library:
1. It is recommended that you shut down and turn OFF the associated server. Turn
OFF all attached devices. Remove the power cords from the server and all
attached accessories.

1 2 3

a29z0100
Figure 3-15. Interface cable connection

Important: Failure to remove the power cords from these devices before
connecting the host interface cable could result in damage to the
library.

1. Attach an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port ( 1 in Figure 3-15).

Note: On rack mount installations, run the cable through the hook and loop fastener
strap on the right rear bracket.

2. Attach the host end of the SAS cable to the drive’s SAS connector ( 2 in
Figure 3-15).

Note: On rack mount installations, run the cable through the hook and loop fastener
strap on the right rear bracket.

3. Attach the other end of the host SAS interface cable to the host or to an interposer
if required.
4. Method 1: Plug the Ethernet cable into your server or PC to access the Web User
Interface directly. This method allows you to modify your server or PC network
settings to match the library default settings, or use the library Operator Panel to
change the library network settings to match the server or PC network settings

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-13

 prior to using the Web User Interface to access the library. If the Ethernet
connection is directly attached to a server or a PC, a crossover Ethernet cable may
be required.
Method 2: Plug the Ethernet cable into an Ethernet switch or router to access the
Web User Interface on a LAN (Local Area Network). The library network settings
must first be entered using the Operator Panel prior to using the Web User
Interface to access the library.

Connecting the Power Cord

Important: This product can ONLY be used with an approved power cord for your
specific geographic region. Use of an unapproved power cord may result
in:
• not meeting individual country specific safety requirements
• overheating with potential personal injury and/or property damage
• a fracture resulting in the internal contacts being exposed, which
potentially could subject the user to a shock hazard

To connect a power cord:

1. Plug one end of the power cord or rack PDU line cord into the power connector
( 3 in Figure 3-15) on the rear panel of the library.

Note: On rack mount installations, run the rack PDU line cord through the hook and
loop fastener strap on the right rear bracket, and tighten the strap. The rack
PDU line cord is a special power cord that plugs into a rack power strip.

2. Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest properly grounded power
outlet. On rack mount installations, plug the other end of the rack PDU line cord
into the nearest rack PDU.
3. Power ON the library by toggling the power switch on the power supply to the
ON (|) position.
4. Wait for the library to initialize.

Note: If the Operator Panel does not initialize, check all cable connections, and
ensure that the cartridge magazine is closed and in the locked position, and
that the power supply switch is in the ON position. If the Operator Panel still
does not initialize, see Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.

Important: To disconnect all power from the library, turn the power switch to the
OFF position, then remove the power cord from the outlet. The power
switch removes power from portions of the library and the drive, but the
power supply still has ac power at its input.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is OFF before
powering ON again.

Configuring the Library

The library can be configured using the Web User Interface and/or the Operator
Panel. The recommended method for configuring your library is using the Web User
Interface. See “Configuring Your Library using the Operator Panel” on page 3-28 and
“Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface” on page 3-16.

3-14 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

For complete detailed information on all of the functions available on the library
using both the Operator Panel and the Web User Interface, see Chapter 4,
“Operations,” on page 4-1.

The default library configuration settings are listed in the Table 3-4.

Table 3-4. Default library configuration settings

Configuration Item Default Setting
NETWORK
Ethernet link speed Auto
SSL security Disabled
IPv4 settings Enabled
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Enabled
Static IP address Disabled
IPv4 address 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0
IPv6 settings Disabled
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Enabled
Stateless auto-configuration Enabled
Static IP address Disabled
IPv6 address 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Prefix length 64
Gateway 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
DNS setting Disabled
DNS IP address 0.0.0.0
PHYSICAL
Library name (Blank)
Auto Cleaning Disabled
Bar code label length 8 characters
LOGICAL
Library mode Random
Loop Enabled
Auto Load Enabled
Active slots 9+0
ENCRYPTION (S4H ONLY)
Encryption method None
Encryption policy Encrypt All
SSL security Disabled
Primary EKM server address 0.0.0.0
Primary EKM TCP port number 3801
Primary EKM SSL port number 443
Secondary EKM server address 0.0.0.0
Secondary EKM TCP port number 3801
Secondary EKM SSL port number 443

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-15

 Table 3-4. Default library configuration settings (continued)
Configuration Item Default Setting
Advanced encryption settings (None)
DATE AND TIME
NTP server Disabled
NTP server address 0.0.0.0
Time zone (GMT) +00:00
Auto adjustment by PC Every 1 minute
NOTIFICATIONS
SMTP (mail) settings
Mail server address 0.0.0.0
Mail event Error events enabled
SNMP (trap) settings
Community Public
Trap event Error events enabled
SNMPv3 engine ID (Set by library firmware)

Static library network settings must be entered using the Operator Panel before the
library can be accessed remotely using the Web User Interface. If your system is
serviced by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server, the network
parameters will be automatically set. Once remote access has been established, you
can complete the configuration of your library remotely.

If you choose to use the Operator Panel to configure your library, go to “Configuring
Your Library using the Operator Panel” on page 3-28.

Configuring Your Library using the Web User Interface

If you choose to use the Web User Interface to configure your library, first enter your
library network settings using the Operator Panel (see “Configuring Network
Settings” on page 3-29).

To configure your library using the Web User Interface, complete the following
procedures:
1. Install Java 1.5.0 or higher on your host computer. Download the latest version of
the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) for your platform from
http://www.java.com/.
2. “Logging in to the Web User Interface” on page 3-17
3. “Checking Firmware Level” on page 3-18
4. “Configuring Library Settings” on page 3-18
5. “Configuring Network Settings” on page 3-20
6. “Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page 3-21
7. “Configuring Encryption Settings” on page 3-22
8. “Configuring E-mail Notifications” on page 3-24
9. “Configuring Trap Notifications” on page 3-25
10. “Managing User Access” on page 3-27
11. “Saving the Library Configuration” on page 3-28

3-16 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Logging in to the Web User Interface
To log in to the Web User Interface, follow the steps below:
1. If necessary, obtain the IP address of the library on the Operator Panel.
a. From the top menu of the Operator Panel, press the Minus key to select View
Current Information, and press Enter.
b. Press the Minus key until the IP Address setting is displayed and make a note
of the IP address.
c. Press the Cancel key repeatedly to log out of the Operator Panel.
2. On your host computer, open Internet Explorer.

Note: Open Internet Explorer on your server or PC to access the Web User
Interface.

3. In the browser address field, enter your library’s IP Address URL to launch the
Web User Interface applet in the browser window. For example,
http://192.168.1.1
When the applet launches, the warning message in Figure 3-16 appears. This
message is normal and does not indicate a problem.
4. Click Run. To bypass the security warning message each time you start a new
browser session, click the Always trust content from this publisher checkbox.

a29z0160

Figure 3-16. Java security warning message

5. On the Web User Interface login screen, enter the administrator login account
name and default password:
• Account: admin
• Password: secure
a29z0099

Figure 3-17. Web User Interface login screen

6. Click Login.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-17

 Checking Firmware Level

a29z0114
Figure 3-18. System summary
To check the firmware level:
1. Visit the web at http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/index.html
to determine the latest levels of firmware for your library.
2. Check the current level of library firmware displayed in the System Summary. If
an updated level of firmware is available, download and update the library
firmware before normal operation starts. See “Updating Library and Drive
Firmware” on page 4-34.

Configuring Library Settings

Logical Library Settings
a29z0124

Figure 3-19. Logical library mode settings

To configure the library access mode settings for the logical library, complete the
following procedure:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Logical in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Library Mode.
• Random — In random mode, the library allows the server’s (host’s)
application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
• Sequential — In sequential mode, the library’s firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library
to select the first available cartridge found (counting from the lowest Column/

3-18 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Tier position through the highest cartridge position in your library) for loading
into the drive. See “Location Coordinates and Element Addresses” on
page 1-8.
– Loop — Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the
lowest Column/Tier cartridge position after the cartridge in the highest
Column/Tier cartridge position has been filled and sent back to its home
position. This allows endless backup operations without user interaction.
– Autoload — Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first
available cartridge (the lowest Column/Tier cartridge position that contains
a cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive.
• Number of active slots — Select the number of active slots and the I/O Station
configuration you would like to assign in your library. The first digit
configures the number of active storage positions (4, 6, 8, or 9). The second
digit configures Column 5, Tier 1 of the magazine as an I/O Station (0 when
disabled, and 1 when enabled). The Auto Cleaning function can be enabled
only if there is at least 1 inactive position in the magazine. If Auto Cleaning is
enabled, the inactive positions become cleaning cartridge positions.
3. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Physical Library Settings

a29z0123
Figure 3-20. Cartridge assignment settings
To configure the library cartridge assignment settings, complete the following
procedure:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Physical in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Library settings.
• Library name — Enter a name for your library.
• Auto Cleaning — Automatically cleans the drive when the drive requests
cleaning and a cleaning cartridge is present in the library. Auto cleaning can be
enabled only when there is at least 1 inactive position in the magazine in the
library.
• Bar code label length — Use to choose the number of characters in the
cartridge bar code that is reported to the host computer.
3. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-19

 Configuring Network Settings

a29z0125
Figure 3-21. Network settings
Once the network settings have been entered on the Operator Panel, the current
network configuration of the library can be modified using the Web User Interface.
The changes made to the network settings do not take affect until after the library is
rebooted.

To modify the network settings, complete the following procedure:

1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Network in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Ethernet Link speed (duplex mode).
3. Select the TCP/IP settings. To enable dual IPv4/IPv6 protocol, select both Use
IPv4 and Use IPv6 and enter parameters for both.
• Security — Select Enable SSL for Web to provide secure communications
between the web browser and the tape library.
• IPv4 setting — Select Use IPv4 to enable the IPv4 Internet Protocol. Select the
corresponding radio button to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) or
use static IP address settings. Enter the following parameters if using static IP
address settings.
– IPv4 address — Sets the TCP/IPv4 address of the library on the network.
– Subnet mask — Defines and limits users within a local network.
– Gateway — Allows access outside the local network.
• IPv6 setting — Select Use IPv6 to enable the IPv6 Internet Protocol. Select the
corresponding radio button to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP), to
obtain an IP address using stateless auto configuration, or use static IP address
settings. Enter the following parameter if using static IP address settings.
– IPv6 address — Sets the TCP/IPv6 address of the library on the network.
– Prefix length — Decimal value indicating the number of contiguous,
high-order bits comprising the network portion of the address.
– Gateway — Allows access outside the local network.

3-20 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 • DNS setting — Select Use DNS to use a domain name server. The DNS server,
if entered, allows the encryption, date and time, and notifications IP addresses
to be specified using hostnames instead of numerical IP addresses.
– DNS IP address — Sets the IP address of the DNS server.
4. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Configuring Date and Time Settings

a29z0170
Figure 3-22. Date and Time settings
Configure the date and time settings using one of three methods: automatically using
a remote NTP time server on the network, automatically using your the clock on your
host computer, or manually.

Note: This is an optional procedure. If you choose to manually set your date and
time, you will need to reset the date and time after power cycling the library.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is OFF before
powering ON again.

Once the network settings have been entered on the Operator Panel, the current date
and time can be modified using the Web User Interface.

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader communicates with an NTP server with the following
conditions:
• client-server basis operation
• UDP (User Datagram Protocol) to access the NTP server
• does not use authentication keys
• library polling is every 12 hours

To modify the date and time settings, complete the following procedure:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Date and Time in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Date and Time settings.
• NTP Server — Enables time and date control using a time server on the
network.
– NTP server address — Enter the IP address of the time server. IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses are supported, depending on the TCP/IP settings.
Hostnames can be entered instead of numerical IP addresses if Use DNS is
selected in the Network settings.
– Time zone — Enter the time zone relative to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
• If the time server is disabled, enter the local time and date manually.
– Date — Enter the date using the MM/DD/YYYY format.
– Time — Enter the time using the HH:MM:SS format.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-21

 • Auto Adjustment by PC — Select a time interval and click Start to
synchronize the library with the clock on your host computer at regular
intervals. The Web User Interface Java Applet must be running continuously
to use this function.
3. Click Submit to update the settings.

Configuring Encryption Settings

a29z0126
Figure 3-23. Encryption settings

Note: This is an optional procedure if you have purchased the Encryption Activation
Key Feature Code 5901. Only the Ultrium 4 Tape Drive (3572-S4H) supports
encryption.

Before you can use the encryption capability of the tape drive, you must be sure that
certain software and hardware requirements are met. Refer to the IBM Encryption Key
Manager component for the Java platform, Introduction, Planning, and User’s Guide before
continuing to the next step.

3-22 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 a29z0171
Figure 3-24. Encryption enabled settings
To modify the encryption settings, complete the following procedure:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Encryption in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Enter the Encryption Activation Key and click Submit to enable encryption in
your library.
3. Select the Security Settings.
• Enable SSL for EKM — Select to enable secure communications between the
tape library and the EKM server.
4. Select the Encryption method settings.
• Application Managed Encryption — For encryption in operating
environments that run an application capable of generating and managing
encryption policies and keys. If you select application-managed encryption, no
further configuration steps are necessary.
• System Managed Encryption — For encryption in operating environments
where no application is capable of key management runs, and encryption is set
up implicitly through each instance of the IBM device driver.
• Library Managed Encryption — For transparent encryption by the TS2900
Tape Autoloader tape drive.

Note: System managed tape encryption and library managed tape encryption
are transparent to one another. A tape encrypted using system managed
encryption may be decrypted using library managed encryption, and vice
versa, provided both have access to the same EKM keystore.

5. Select the Primary EKM Server Settings (library-managed encryption only) — The
address of the primary encryption key manager on a server. IPv4 and IPv6
addresses are supported. Hostnames can be entered instead of numerical IP
addresses if the DNS server is specified.
• Address — The IP address of the primary encryption key manager.
• TCP port number — The port number of the primary encryption key manager
for TCP. The default port number is 3801.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-23

 • SSL port number — The port number of the primary encryption key manager
for SSL. The default port number is 443.
6. Select the Secondary EKM Server Settings (library-managed encryption only) —
The address of the secondary encryption key manager on a server. IPv4 and IPv6
addresses are supported. Hostnames can be entered instead of numerical IP
addresses if the DNS server is specified.
• Address — The IP address of the secondary encryption key manager.
• TCP port number — The port number of the secondary encryption key
manager for TCP. The default port number is 3801.
• SSL port number — The port number of the secondary encryption key
manager for SSL. The default port number is 443.
7. Select the Encryption policy settings (library-managed encryption only).
• Encrypt All — All tape cartridges loaded into the tape drive are encrypted.
• Internal Label - Selective Encryption — This option is used only for
Symantec’s Veritas NetBackup™.
• Internal Label - Encrypt All — This option is used only for Symantec’s Veritas
NetBackup™.
8. Skip over the Advanced Encryption Settings. The purpose of these advanced
encryption settings is to allow only IBM Support personnel (under the direction
of the drive development team) to provide a solution to an unforeseen problem
or to support a unique configuration. These options are not intended for use by
the customer without the guidance of IBM Technical Support.
9. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Configuring E-mail Notifications

a29z0127

Figure 3-25. E-mail notifications

Note: This is an optional procedure.

To set up e-mail notifications of library events, complete the following procedure:

1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Notifications in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.

3-24 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 2. Click on the SMTP (Mail) Settings tab.
3. Configure the SMTP server and header settings.
• SMTP server address — SMTP mail server address. IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are supported. Hostnames can be entered instead of numerical IP addresses if
the DNS server is specified in the Network settings.
• Sender address — Mail header information.
• Subject — Mail header information.
4. Enter the e-mail addresses to be notified when an event takes place in the Mail
To fields.
5. Select the event level to report in the Mail Event field.
6. Click Test to send a test e-mail message to the enabled addresses.
7. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Configuring Trap Notifications

a29z0128

Figure 3-26. Trap notifications

Note: This is an optional procedure.

The traps supported by the TS2900 Tape Autoloader are listed in “Trap Definitions
(Types)” on page B-12.

To set up trap notifications for an SNMP server, complete the following procedure:
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Notifications in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Click on the SNMP Settings tab.
3. Configure the SNMP server and header settings.
• Community — SNMP community name to which the library belongs.
• Name — Unique SNMP name for the system.
• Location — Physical location of the system.
• Contact — Contact person’s name.
• SNMPv3 engine ID — A read-only attribute identifying the SNMPv3 engine.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-25

 4. Enter the trap IP addresses of the SNMP monitoring stations to be notified when
an event takes place and the security settings in the Trap List pop-up menu.

a29z0140
Figure 3-27. Trap list settings
• Validity — Enable/Disable setting.
• Trap version — v1, v2c, or v3. For v2c and v3, the Inform checkbox
determines whether an SNMP INFORM request is sent instead of a trap event.
• IP address — IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported. Hostnames can be
entered instead of numerical IP addresses if the DNS server is specified.
• Community (v1 or v2c) — SNMP community name.
• User name (v3 only) — SNMPv3 unique user name.
• Authentication (v3 only) — Authentication algorithm, MD5 or SHA. When an
algorithm is specified, an authentication password and confirmation of the
password are required.
• Privacy (v3 only) — Privacy service encryption and decryption algorithm, DES
or AES. When an algorithm is specified, a privacy password and confirmation
of the password are required.
5. Enter the SNMPv3 users who are permitted to access the tape library in the
SNMPv3 User List pop-up menu.
a29z0141

Figure 3-28. SNMPv3 user list settings

• Validity — Enable/Disable setting.
• User name — SNMPv3 unique user name.
• Authentication — Authentication algorithm, MD5 or SHA. When an
algorithm is specified, an authentication password and confirmation of the
password are required.

3-26 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 • Privacy — Privacy service encryption and decryption algorithm, DES or AES.
When an algorithm is specified, a privacy password and confirmation of the
password are required.
6. Select the event level to report in the Trap event field.
7. Click Test to send a test trap notification to the enabled IP addresses.
8. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Managing User Access

a29z0122
Figure 3-29. User access settings

Note: This is an optional procedure.

To add users able to access the library using the Web User Interface, complete the
following procedure.
1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on User Access in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Select the Add action in the pop-up menu.
• Add — To add new users.
• Modify — To change the selected user’s access role and/or password.
• Remove — To delete the selected user from the system.
a29z0139

Figure 3-30. Add User dialog

3. Enter the user name and password information in the dialog box.
4. Assign a user access role.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-27

 • User — User access permission allows users to monitor the library, but not to
perform functions that affect the library.
• Superuser — Superuser access permission allows users to operate the physical
and logical library, but not to change configuration settings.
• Administrator — Administrator access permission allows users to perform
tape library functions and change configuration settings.
5. Click Submit to enable the settings.

Saving the Library Configuration

a29z0129
Figure 3-31. Save configuration

Note: This is a recommended procedure.

Each time you change the configuration of your library, you should save the
configuration. This function also allows you to maintain several library configuration
profiles that can be restored to the library when desired using the Web User Interface.

To save library configuration, complete the following procedure.

1. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Save/Restore in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
2. Click Save to create a configuration file of your library on your computer.

Configuring Your Library using the Operator Panel

To configure your library using the Operator Panel, complete the following
procedures.
1. “Logging in to the Operator Panel” on page 3-28
2. “Configuring Network Settings” on page 3-29
3. “Configuring Library Settings” on page 3-30

Logging in to the Operator Panel

In many environments, the default network settings may be sufficient to access your
tape library on a network. To change the default network settings using the Operator
Panel, complete the following procedure:
1. When the library is initialized, press the Enter key to move to the Password
screen.
2. Enter 0000, the default password. The top menu screen appears.
3. When finished using the Operator Panel, press Cancel to return to the top menu
screen.
4. When finished, press the Minus key to select Logout, and press Enter.

3-28 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Configuring Network Settings
In many environments, the default network settings may be sufficient to access your
tape library on a network. To change the default network settings using the Operator
Panel, complete the following procedure:
1. From the top menu screen, press the Minus key to select Configuration, and
press Enter.
2. Link speed (Default: Auto Negotiation)
a. Select Configure Network Settings → Configure Link Speed.
b. Select the required speed and press Enter.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
The speed must be set to Set Auto Negotiation for gigabit Ethernet networks.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
3. DHCP IPv4 (Default: Enabled)
a. Select Configure Network Settings → Configure DHCP → Configure
DHCP IPv4.
b. Select Enable DHCP IPv4 and press Enter to enable, or press Down and select
Disable DHCP IPv4 to disable.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
4. DHCP IPv6 (Default: Disabled)
a. Select Configure Network Settings → Configure DHCP → Configure
DHCP IPv6.
b. Select Enable DHCP IPv6 and press Enter to enable, or press Down and select
Disable DHCP IPv6 to disable.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
5. IPv4/IPv6 Address (Default: 0.0.0.0). If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address
manually.
a. Select Configure Network Settings → Change IP Address.
b. Select Set IP Address IPv4 to enter the IPv4 address of the tape library or Set
IP Address IPv6 to enter the IPv6 IP address (split over 4 screens).
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
6. IPv4 Subnet Mask (Default: 255.255.255.0). If DHCP IPv4 is disabled, set the
IPv4 subnet mask manually.
a. Select Configure Network Settings → Change Subnet Mask → Set Subnet
Mask.
b. Enter the IPv4 subnet mask.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
7. IPv6 Prefix Length (Default: 64). If DHCP IPv6 is disabled, set the IPv6 prefix
length manually.
a. Select Configure Network Settings → Change Subnet Mask → Set Prefix
Length.
b. Enter the IPv4 prefix length.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
8. IPv4/IPv6 Gateway (Default: 0.0.0.0). If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address
manually.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-29

 a. Select Configure Network Settings → Change Gateway.
b. Select Set Gateway Address IPv4 to enter the IPv4 gateway address or Set
Gateway Address IPv6 to enter the IPv6 gateway address (split over 4
screens).
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
9. Press Cancel to return to the Network Settings menu.
10. Press Cancel to return to the Configuration menu.
11. Press Cancel to return to the top menu screen.

Configuring Library Settings

To configure the library settings, complete the following procedure:
1. From the top menu screen, press the Minus key to select Configuration, and
press Enter.
2. Select Configure Library, and press Enter.
3. I/O Station (Default: Disabled)
a. Select Configure Library → Configure I/O Station.
b. Select Enable I/O Station to enable the 1-slot I/O Station or Disable I/O
Station to disable.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
4. Active Slots (Default: All)
a. Select Configure Library → Set Active Slots Count.
b. Select the number of active slots you would like to assign for the logical
library.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
5. Library Mode (Default: Random)
a. Select Configure Library → Configure Library Mode.
b. Select Set Random Mode or Configure Sequential Mode, and press Enter.
Random — In random mode, the library allows the server’s (host’s)
application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
Sequential — In sequential mode, the library’s firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library
to select the first available cartridge found (counting from the lowest
Column/Tier position through the highest cartridge position in your library)
for loading into the drive.
• Loop — Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the
lowest Column/Tier cartridge position after the cartridge in the highest
Column/Tier cartridge position has been filled and sent back to its home
position. This allows endless backup operations without user interaction.
• Autoload — Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first
available cartridge (the lowest Column/Tier cartridge position that
contains a cartridge) automatically if the library powers ON with an empty
drive.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
6. Date/Time – Enter the local time and date manually if you do not plan to use a
network-based time server.
a. Select Configure Library → Configure Date/Time.
b. Select Set Date or Set Time, and press Enter.

3-30 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 • Date — Enter the date using the MM/DD/YYYY format.
• Time — Enter the time using the HH:MM:SS format.
c. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy.
7. Auto Cleaning (Default: Disabled)
a. Select Configuration → Configure Auto Cleaning.
b. Select Enable Auto Cleaning or Disable Auto Cleaning, and press Enter. The
Auto Cleaning function can only be enabled if there is at least 1 inactive
position in the magazine in the library.
c. Press Enter again to apply the setting, or Cancel to reject the setting.
d. Press Cancel to backtrack through the menu hierarchy

Populating the Library with Cartridges

The magazine is opened using the Operator Panel.

To populate the library with data and cleaning cartridges, complete the following
procedure:
1. From the top menu screen on the Operator Panel, press the Minus key to select
Unlock Magazine, and press Enter.
2. Insert cartridges in the magazine.

Note: A blue release gate ( 1 in Figure 3-32) in the top left corner of each column
in the cartridge magazine prevents each cartridge from falling out of the
front of the magazine. When manually releasing the gate with one hand,
position your other hand in front of the column opening to prevent
cartridges being ejected by the internal column spring.

a29z0101

Figure 3-32. Cartridge release gate

Note: Column 5 Tier 2 is reserved as the exchange position. This position is

accessible by the library only. A locking mechanism prevents insertion of
a cartridge into the reserved slot.

Each cartridge must be inserted with the indicator arrow on the leading edge of
the upper surface of the cartridge pointing towards the cartridge magazine (see
Figure 3-33 on page 3-32).

Note: Do not rely on the bar code label orientation, if attached, to provide an
indication of the correct cartridge orientation. The bar code label should
be right side up if attached correctly.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-31

 L T O 1 2 3 L4

a29z0056
Figure 3-33. Cartridge orientation
The Auto Cleaning function can be enabled only if the number of active slots is
less than the maximum available slots. The active slots are always enabled
starting with the lowest numerical cartridge position number in the magazine,
and are located at the drive end of the cartridge magazine. Place cleaning
cartridges in inactive cartridge positions for use by the auto cleaning function.
Do not store data or cleaning cartridges in the I/O Station (Column 5, Tier 1) if
the I/O Station is enabled.
3. Put the magazine back into the library and wait for the library inventory to
complete before proceeding to the next step.
4. Press Cancel to return to the top level menu.

Verifying Library and Drive Operation

To verify the library is operating correctly:
1. From the top menu screen on the Operator Panel, press the Minus key to select
Service, and press Enter.
2. Press the Minus key to select Diagnostics, and press Enter.
3. Select Run Library Verify, and press Enter. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The library performs a Power ON Self Test (POST), the normal test sequence
performed when the library is turned ON, to ensure that the library hardware is
functional. Then, the library tests communications with the tape drives over the
internal bus. If there is a cartridge in a drive, the library moves the cartridge to its
home position, or to the I/O Station if the home position is not known.
4. When prompted, insert a customer supplied scratch cartridge into the I/O
Station.
When the scratch cartridge is loaded, the bar code reader reads the bar code label
on the cartridge and stores it for later comparison. The cartridge is then moved to
the tape drive, where the drive runs its own write/read/verify test. When the
test is done, the library tells the drive to eject the cartridge, and then the cartridge
is moved back to the I/O Station. The bar code is read again and compared with
the value stored earlier.
5. When prompted, remove the cartridge from the I/O Station.

3-32 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 The result of the test is reported on the Operator Panel.
If an error occurs, note the error code number and see Appendix B, “Error
Codes,” on page B-1.
6. Press Cancel to return to the top level menu.

Taking the Library Online

When your library is completely configured, you are ready to save the library
configuration and take the library online.

Note: The tape drive is always online, regardless of whether the library is online or
offline.

To take the library online using the Operator Panel:

1. From the top menu screen, press the Minus key to select Commands, and press
Enter.
2. Select Change Library State, and press Enter.
3. Select Set Library Online, and press Enter.
4. Press Cancel repeatedly to return to the top level menu.
5. Press the Minus key to select Logout, and press Enter.

To take the library online using the Web User Interface:

1. Save the library configuration.
a. Expand Configure Library, if necessary, and click on Save/Restore in the left
navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
b. Click Save, and then enter a file name and select a location to save the
configuration file.
2. Verify the library state.
a. Click on Library State in the left navigation pane of the Web User Interface.
b. If the library is offline, click Bring Online.
c. Click Yes to confirm when prompted.
A message dialog appears when the operation is completed.
3. Click on Logoff in the top right corner of the window.

Registering for My Notification

My Notification registration provides e-mail notification from IBM when new
firmware levels have been updated and are available for download and installation as
well as other information about your library.

To register for My Notification:

• Visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/, click Get support, and then click
My support.
• Enter your user name and password on the Appendix F, “Library Configuration
Form,” on page F-1.

IBM recommends that you update library and drive firmware when new levels
become available. For instructions on updating library and drive firmware, see
“Updating Library and Drive Firmware” on page 4-34.
Now you are ready to use your library.

Chapter 3. Installation and Configuration 3-33

3-34 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Operations

Operator Panel Monitoring the Library “Viewing Configuration Settings” on page 4-3
“Viewing Current Information” on page 4-3
“Viewing Firmware Revision” on page 4-3
Managing the Library “Unlocking the I/O Station” on page 4-4
“Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine” on page 4-4
“Moving Cartridges” on page 4-5
“Unloading the Drive” on page 4-5
“Cleaning the Drive Manually” on page 4-5
“Conducting a Library Inventory” on page 4-6
“Taking the Library Online/Offline” on page 4-6
“Powering Down the Library” on page 4-6
“Preparing to Ship the Library” on page 4-6
“Rebooting the Drive” on page 4-7
“Rebooting the Library” on page 4-7
“Logging Out of the Library” on page 4-7
Configuring the Library “Configuring the I/O Station” on page 4-7
“Configuring Auto Cleaning” on page 4-8
“Configuring the Number of Active Slots” on page 4-8
“Configuring the Library Access Mode” on page 4-8
“Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page 4-9
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 4-10
“Configuring Operator Panel Settings” on page 4-11
“Setting the Library to Factory Defaults” on page 4-11
Servicing the Library “Checking the Library Error Status” on page 4-12
“Running Library Verify Diagnostics” on page 4-12
“Running Drive Diagnostics” on page 4-13

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 4-1

Web User Interface Monitoring the Library “Viewing the System Summary” on page 4-15
“Viewing the Library Map” on page 4-16
Managing the Library “Moving Cartridges” on page 4-17
“Unloading the Drive” on page 4-18
“Cleaning the Drive Manually” on page 4-18
“Taking the Library Online/Offline” on page 4-19
“Conducting a Library Inventory” on page 4-19
Configuring the Library “Managing User Access” on page 4-20
“Configuring Physical Library Settings” on page 4-21
“Configuring Logical Library Settings” on page 4-21
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 4-22
“Configuring Encryption Settings” on page 4-23
“Configuring Date and Time Settings” on page 4-25
“Configuring E-mail Notifications” on page 4-26
“Configuring SNMP Trap Notifications” on page 4-27
“Saving and Restoring Configuration Settings” on page 4-28
Servicing the Library “Running Encryption Key Path Diagnostics” on page 4-30
“Viewing Operator Interventions” on page 4-30
“Viewing Library Logs” on page 4-31
“Viewing Trace Data” on page 4-32
“Downloading Drive Logs” on page 4-33
“Downloading Library Logs” on page 4-33
“Resetting the Library/Drive” on page 4-33
“Updating Library and Drive Firmware” on page 4-34
“Viewing Accessor Statistics” on page 4-35

Using the Operator Panel

Figure 4-1 shows the top level menu tree structure of the Operator Panel on the front
of the TS2900 Tape Autoloader. For details on how to select commands and options,
see the description in “Operator Panel” on page 2-1.

Top Level Commands Configuration Service

Unlock I/O Station* Move Cartridge Configure Library View Error Status

Unlock Magazine Unload Configure Auto Cleaning Diagnostics

Commands → Clean Drive Configure Network Settings View Firmware Revision

Configuration → Inventory Configure Op Panel Settings Telnet Service Port*

View Current Information Move to Ship Position View Settings * For use by IBM Technical
Support only.
Service → Reboot Drive Set Default

Logout Reboot Library

* If enabled. Change Library State

Figure 4-1. Operator Panel top level menus

4-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Monitoring the Library
Viewing Configuration Settings
Configuration

View Settings

Figure 4-2. Configuration settings

Use Configuration → View Settings to display a list of the library configuration
settings.

The settings displayed comprises the following:

• Library settings
– I/O Station
– Auto cleaning
– Number of cleaning slots
– Operator Panel back light setting
• Network settings
– Link speed
– IP address protocol
– IPv4 settings (IP address, subnet mask address, gateway address, DHCP)
– IPv6 settings (IP address, gateway address, prefix length, DHCP)
• Drive settings
– Model number

Viewing Current Information

View Current Information

Figure 4-3. Current information

Use View Current Information to display the network settings information.

The settings displayed comprises the following:

• Network settings
– Worldwide node name
– IP address protocol stack
– IP address

Viewing Firmware Revision

Service

View Firmware Revision

Figure 4-4. Hardware attributes

Use Service → View Firmware Revision to display the current version of the library
firmware.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-3

 Managing the Library
Unlocking the I/O Station
Unlock I/O Station

Figure 4-5. Unlock I/O Station command

Use Unlock I/O Station to unlock the I/O Station. This menu option is available only
when the I/O Station is enabled in the library configuration settings.

a29z0024
Figure 4-6. I/O Station unlocked
After closing the I/O Station, wait for the library to complete its inventory before
proceeding with normal library operations.

Note: A blue release gate in the top left corner of each column in the cartridge
magazine prevents each cartridge from falling out of the front of the magazine.
When manually releasing the gate with one hand, position your other hand in
front of the column opening to prevent cartridges being ejected by the internal
column spring.

Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine

Unlock Magazine

Figure 4-7. Unlock Magazine command

Use Unlock Magazine to unlock and remove the cartridge magazine.
When the cartridge magazine is unlocked, it can be removed from the library to insert
and/or remove data and cleaning cartridges. When the cartridge magazine is fully
inserted, the magazine locks into place.

After closing the magazine, wait for the library to complete its inventory before
proceeding with normal library operations.

4-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Note: A blue release gate in the top left corner of each column in the cartridge
magazine prevents each cartridge from falling out of the front of the magazine.
When manually releasing the gate with one hand, position your other hand in
front of the column opening to prevent cartridges being ejected by the internal
column spring.

Moving Cartridges
Commands

Move Cartridge

Source Slot

Destination Slot

Figure 4-8. Move Cartridge command

Use Commands → Move Cartridge to move data cartridges and cleaning cartridges
between the I/O Station, storage positions, and tape drive.

Specify the following parameters:

• Source Slot — Specify a source that contains a cartridge.
• Destination Slot — Specify the destination.

Select Execute to move the cartridge from the source to the destination.

Note: Cartridges cannot be moved to the Accessor using this command, but can be
moved from the Accessor using this command if, for example, the library was
powered OFF with a tape still held in the Picker.

Unloading the Drive

Commands

Unload

Figure 4-9. Unload command

Use Commands → Unload to unload the cartridge from the tape head mechanism.
The cartridge is still retained inside the tape drive housing. Moving a tape cartridge
from the drive to another location both unloads and moves the cartridge in a single
action.

Select Execute to unload the cartridge from the tape head mechanism.

Cleaning the Drive Manually

Commands

Clean Drive

Cleaning Slot

Figure 4-10. Clean Drive command

Use Commands → Clean Drive to clean the tape drive manually using a cleaning
cartridge located in either a cartridge storage position or the I/O Station.

Specify the following parameter:

• Cleaning Slot — Specify the cartridge position that contains a cleaning cartridge.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-5

 Select Execute to move the cleaning cartridge to the drive and start drive head
cleaning. The cleaning cartridge is returned to its home position when cleaning is
finished.

Conducting a Library Inventory

Commands

Inventory

Figure 4-11. Inventory command

Use Commands → Inventory to force the library to execute an inventory of the
cartridge magazine, accessor, and tape drive to refresh the library map. An inventory
is conducted automatically when power is turned ON and when the cartridge
magazine is inserted.

Select Execute to conduct the inventory.

Taking the Library Online/Offline

Commands

Change Library State

Set Library Online

Set Library Offline

Figure 4-12. Online/Offline command

Use Commands → Change Library State to take the library online or offline.

It is sometimes necessary to take the library offline before performing some servicing
functions for the library. Once these operations have finished, it is necessary to bring
the library back online.

Note: The tape drive is always online, even when the library is offline.

Powering Down the Library

Before powering OFF the library, make sure that the library is in an idle state with no
mechanical movement of the Accessor, and all data operations (e.g. backup
operations, accessing of log files, etc.) have completed. Then, power OFF the library
using the power switch on the rear panel of the library.

Important: If you switch the library power OFF while the library is being accessed,
loss of data may occur.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is OFF before
powering ON again.

Preparing to Ship the Library

Commands

Move to Ship Position

Figure 4-13. Move to Ship Position command

Use Commands → Move to Ship Position when preparing to move the library to a
new location. The Accessor must be placed in a parked position within the library

4-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 housing. Move to Ship Position finishes all active commands received from the host
application, does not process any new commands, and moves the Accessor to the
parked position before the power is turned OFF.

Select Execute to unlock the cartridge magazine to remove the cartridges. Reinsert the
cartridge magazine before moving the tape library. The Accessor assembly is secured
in place using the Accessor locking screw that came with the library. The Accessor
locking screw is located on the rear panel of the library.

Rebooting the Drive

Commands

Reboot Drive

Figure 4-14. Reboot Drive command

Use Commands → Reboot Drive to force the drive to reboot. You also specify
whether the library should come online/offline after it finishes rebooting.

Select Execute to reboot the drive.

Rebooting the Library

Commands

Reboot Library

Figure 4-15. Reboot Library command

Use Commands → Reboot Library to force the library to reboot. You also specify
whether the library should come online/offline after it finishes rebooting.

Select Execute to reboot the library.

Logging Out of the Library

Logout

Figure 4-16. Logout command

Use Logout to logout of the library. The login screen is displayed for the next user.

Configuring the Library

Configuring the I/O Station
Configuration

Configure Library

Configure I/O Station

Enable I/O Station

Disable I/O Station

Figure 4-17. I/O Station setting

Use Configuration → Configure Library → Configure I/O Station to enable or
disable Column 5, Tier 1 in the magazine as an I/O Station slot.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-7

 Configuring Auto Cleaning
Configuration

Configure Auto Cleaning

Enable Auto Cleaning

Disable Auto Cleaning

Figure 4-18. Auto Cleaning settings

Use Configuration → Configure Auto Cleaning to enable or disable automatic head
cleaning of the tape drive in the library.

The drive can also be cleaned manually. For details, see “Cleaning the Drive
Manually” on page 4-5.

Configuring the Number of Active Slots

Configuration

Configure Library

Set Active Slots Count

Active Slots

Figure 4-19. Active slot count settings

Use Configuration → Configure Library → Set Active Slots Count to set the number
of active data cartridge positions within the logical library.

Configure the number of active slots using the following setting:

• Active Slots — The maximum number of active slots that can be set is dependent
upon the I/O Station configuration and Auto Cleaning setting.

The active cartridge slots always begin with the cartridge position with the lowest
cartridge address within the logical library.

Configuring the Library Access Mode

Configuration

Configure Library

Configure Library Mode

Set Random Mode

Set Sequential Mode

Configure Loop Mode

Enable Loop Mode

Disable Loop Mode

Configure Autoload Mode

Enable Autoload Mode

Disable Autoload Mode

Figure 4-20. Library access mode settings

4-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Use Configuration → Configure Library → Configure Library Mode to set the
logical library access mode.

Configure the library access mode using the following settings:

• Random Mode — In random mode, the library allows the server’s (host’s)
application software to select any data cartridge in any order.
• Sequential Mode — In sequential mode, the library’s firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library to
select the first available cartridge found (counting from the lowest Column/Tier
position through the highest cartridge position in your library) for loading into the
drive.
– Loop — Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest
Column/Tier cartridge position after the cartridge in the highest Column/Tier
cartridge position has been filled and sent back to its home position. This allows
endless backup operations without user interaction.
– Autoload — Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available
cartridge (the lowest Column/Tier cartridge position that contains a cartridge)
automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive.

Configuring Date and Time Settings

Configuration

Configure Library

Configure Date/Time

Set Date

Set Time

Figure 4-21. Date and Time settings

Use Configuration → Configure Library → Configure Date/Time to set the date and
time on your library manually after a power disruption and when daylight savings
time starts and ends. The date is set in MM/DD/YYYY format, and the time is set in
24-hour HH:MM:SS format.

The current date and time can also be controlled automatically using a network-based
Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. For more information, see “Configuring
Network Settings” on page 4-22.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-9

 Configuring Network Settings
Configuration

Configure Network Settings

Configure Link Speed

Set Auto Negotiation

Set 10 Base-T Full

Set 10 Base-T Half

Set 100 Base-T Full

Set 100 Base-T Half

Configure DHCP

Configure DHCP IPv4

Enable DHCP IPv4

Disable DHCP IPv4

Configure DHCP IPv6

Enable DHCP IPv6

Disable DHCP IPv6

Change IP Address

Set IP Address IPv4 Input IP Address

Set IP Address IPv6 Input IP Address x 4

Change Subnet Mask

Set Subnet Mask Input Subnet Mask

Set Prefix Length Input Prefix

Change Gateway

Set Gateway Address IPv4 Input Gateway

Set Gateway Address IPv6 Input Gateway x 4

Figure 4-22. Network settings

Use Configuration → Configure Network Settings to set the network settings for the
library.

Note: The internet protocol (IPv4, IPv6 or dual IPv4/IPv6) selection is used for the
TS2900 Tape Autoloader IP address, subnet mask, gateway address, time
server address, mail server address, SNMP trap address, and EKM server
addresses.

Configure the network using the following settings:

• Link Speed — Ethernet duplex mode (Auto, 10Base-T Full, 10Base-T Half,
100Base-TX Full, 100Base-TX Half).
• DHCP — (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Enable DHCP to have the library
server or router negotiate the connection with the library.
– IPv4 — Select to enable DHCP using the IPv4 protocol.
– IPv6 — Select to enable DHCP using the IPv6 protocol

4-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 • IP Address — If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address of the library manually.
– IPv4 — Select to enter the library IP address using the IPv4 protocol.
– IPv6 — Select to enter four library IP addresses using the IPv6 protocol.
• Subnet Mask — If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address of the subnet mask.
– Subnet Mask — Select to enter the subnet mask address using the IPv4 protocol.
– Prefix Length — Select to enter the prefix length for the IPv6 protocol.
• Gateway — If DHCP is disabled, set the IP address of the gateway.
– IPv4 — Select to enter the gateway IP address using the IPv4 protocol.
– IPv6 — Select to enter four gateway IP addresses using the IPv6 protocol.

Configuring Operator Panel Settings

Configuration

Configure Op Panel Settings

Configure LCD Back Light

Enable Auto Back Light

Input Count (min)

Disable Auto Back Light

Change Login Password

New Password

Reenter Password

Figure 4-23. Operator Panel settings

Use Configuration → Configure Op Panel Settings to set the preferences when
using the Operator Panel.

Configure the Operator Panel using the following settings:

• Back light — Select to enable the LCD back light when using the Operator Panel.
– Input Count — If the auto back light is enabled, specify the time duration before
the back light turns OFF. The setting uses a 4-digit timer in minutes.
• Login Password — Select to change the Operator Panel 4-character login
password. The new password must be re-entered for confirmation before the
password is changed (default: 0000).

Setting the Library to Factory Defaults

Configuration

Set Default

Figure 4-24. Factory default settings

Use Configuration → Set Default to reset the library to the factory default settings.
See Table 3-4, “Default library configuration settings,” on page 3-15. The date and
time must be reset after restoring factory default settings. See “Configuring Date and
Time Settings” on page 4-9.

Important: This configuration setting deletes all current library settings, and should
be used with utmost caution.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-11

 To restore your library configuration, see “Saving and Restoring Configuration
Settings” on page 4-28.

Servicing the Library

The Service menu on the Operator Panel gives users access to troubleshooting and
maintenance diagnostic tools.
Checking the Library Error Status
Service

View Error Status

View Library Error Status

View Drive Error Status

Figure 4-25. Error status menu

Use Service → View Error Status to check the current status of the major library
components.

Select the component to view its error status:

• Library — Checks the error status of the library.
• Drive — Checks the error status of the tape drive.

If an error occurs, press the Enter key to display specific error information. You can
check the meaning of error codes in Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on page B-1.

Running Library Verify Diagnostics

Service

Diagnostics

Run Library Verify

Figure 4-26. Library Verify diagnostics

Use Service → Diagnostics → Run Library Verify to test the library and drive
hardware, communications, and the read/write capability of the library. Library
Verify is the most critical and most frequently used test, and should be executed after
all maintenance procedures to ensure correct library performance.

Note: Running the Library Verify diagnostic test will unload tape cartridges in the
drives if the host application has not already done so.

To run library verification diagnostic tests:

1. Select Run Library Verify, and press Enter. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The library performs a Power ON Self Test (POST), the normal test sequence
performed when the library is turned ON, to ensure that the library hardware is
functional. Then, the library tests communications with the tape drive over the
internal bus. If there is a cartridge in the drive, the library moves the cartridge to
its home position, or to the I/O Station if the home position is not known.
2. When prompted, insert a scratch cartridge into the I/O Station.
When the scratch cartridge is loaded, an inventory is conducted and the bar code
reader reads the bar code label on the cartridge and stores it for later comparison.
The scratch cartridge is then moved to the tape drive, where the drive runs its
own write/read/verify test. When the test is done, the library tells the drive to

4-12 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 eject the scratch cartridge, and then the cartridge is moved back to the I/O
Station. The bar code is read again and compared with the value stored earlier.
3. When prompted, remove the scratch cartridge from the I/O Station.
The result of the test (PASSED or error message) is reported on the Operator
Panel.
4. View the Error Log to check if any errors occur.
If an error occurs, see Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on page B-1 to identify and
locate the problem.

Running Drive Diagnostics

Service

Diagnostics

Drive Diagnostics

Run Normal Read/Write Test

Run Perform Read/Write Test

Run Media Test

Run Head Test

Run SAS Wrap Test

Figure 4-27. Drive diagnostics

Use Service → Diagnostics → Drive Diagnostics to run various drive-related
diagnostic tests.

To run drive diagnostic tests:

1. Select Drive Diagnostics, and press Enter. Select one of the diagnostic tests and
follow the on-screen instructions.
2. When prompted, insert a scratch (blank) cartridge into the I/O Station.
• Normal Read/Write Test — Runs most of the tests that normally occur when
the library is powered ON (POST). When prompted, load a scratch cartridge to
run the calibrate drive, read/write, and tape motion tests. These tests calibrate
the read/write channel to optimum settings, run a long read/write test using
all servo positions, and exercise all of the tape motion functions of the drive.
Takes approximately 18 minutes.
• Perform Read/Write Test (Performance R/W Test) — Runs a shortened
version of the Normal R/W Test. It does not include the POST diagnostic,
calibrate drive, or unique tape motion tests. It checks the motors and head by
running read/write tests on a shortened section of tape, both inbound and
outbound. Takes approximately 4 minutes (if no error occurs) to 9 minutes (if
calibration is required).
• Media Test — Runs tests on a tape cartridge. When prompted, insert the
cartridge to test into the I/O Station. This test overwrites any data on the
cartridge. It runs read/write tests on the outer tracks of the tape to verify the
media tracking and performance. Takes approximately 9 minutes.
• Head Test — Runs read/write tests on the tape drive head. When prompted,
insert a scratch cartridge into the I/O Station. It runs read/write tests on the
inner tracks of the tape to verify the head performance. Takes approximately 6
minutes.
• SAS Wrap Test — Runs tests on the SAS interface SCSI controller. Remove the
SAS cable from the library and insert the SAS wrap tool (see Figure 4-28 on

Chapter 4. Operations 4-13

 page 4-14) into the SAS host connector. Start the SAS wrap test. If the wrap test
fails, contact your next level of support.

a29z0053
Figure 4-28. SAS wrap tool
3. When prompted, remove the cartridge from the I/O Station.
The result of the test (PASSED or error message) is reported on the Operator
Panel.
4. View the Error Log to check if any errors occur.
If an error occurs, see Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on page B-1 to identify and
locate the problem.

Using the Web User Interface

Figure 4-1 shows all the menu options available from the Web User Interface for the
Administrator User account. For information on the menu user access privileges for
User, Superuser, and Administrator accounts, see “User Privileges” on page 2-8.

Monitor Library Manage Library Configure Library Service Library

System Summary Move Cartridges User Access Key Path Diagnostics

Library Map Unload Physical Operator Interventions

Clean Drive Logical View Library Logs

Library State Network Traces

Inventory Encryption Download Drive Logs

Date and Time Download Library Logs

Notifications Reset Library/Drive

Save/Restore Firmware Update

Usage Statistics

Figure 4-29. Web User Interface menu

4-14 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Monitoring the Library
Viewing the System Summary

a29z0114
Figure 4-30. System Summary screen
Use Monitor Library → System Summary to display a summary of the current status
of the tape drive and the library, and the current configuration of the library,
comprising:
• Library name
• Library status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
• Drive status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
• I/O Station status (Open/Closed, when I/O Station is enabled)
• Operator Panel LED indicators
• Number of cartridges and slot configuration
– Cartridge in the drive (0 or 1); Slots value is always “N/A”
– Number of cartridges in the active slots; Number of active slots
– Number of cartridges in the inactive slots; Number of inactive slots
– Number of cartridges in the I/O Station (0 or 1) when enabled; Number of I/O
Station slots
– Number of cartridges in the reserved slot; Number of reserved slots
• Library firmware version
• Library serial number
• Drive firmware version

Chapter 4. Operations 4-15

 Viewing the Library Map

a29z0115
Figure 4-31. Library Map screen
Use Monitor Library → Library Map to display a graphical view of the library. Each
component of the library is represented by a clickable icon. Select a component in the
library map to display detailed information for that component of the library on the
right side of the page. A grayed out column represents the I/O Station. The
information displayed varies according to the type of device selected:
• Library information
– Accessor status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
– Drive status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
– I/O Station (Enabled or Disabled)
– Auto cleaning (Enabled or Disabled)
– Magazine status (Inserted or Open)
– Library mode (Random or Sequential. In Sequential mode, Loop and Auto load
mode are also displayed)
• Ethernet information (click the Library component twice to access the Ethernet
information)
– Status
– Protocol
– IP addresses
– Addressing method
– Subnet mask
– Gateway address
– Library Worldwide node name
– MAC address
– Link speed
– NTP server
– SNMP trap
– E-mail address

4-16 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 • Cartridge
– Cartridge label detected by the bar code reader
– Encryption setting (for data cartridges – Model S4H only)
– Media status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
– Remaining uses (for cleaning cartridge)
• Column n, Tier n
– Slot type (storage, I/O Station, or cleaning)
– Element address
• Drive information
– Status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
– Vendor ID
– Product ID
– Firmware version
– Serial number
– World wide node name
– Encryption capability (Model S4H only)
• Accessor information
– Status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
– Accessor event

Managing the Library

Moving Cartridges

a29z0116

Figure 4-32. Move Cartridges screen

Use Manage Library → Move Cartridges to move data and cleaning cartridges
between the I/O Station, storage positions, inactive slots, and tape drive. Move
cartridges by clicking and dragging a cartridge from one location to another, or by
right-clicking a cartridge and selecting a destination.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-17

 Select a cartridge to display information for that cartridge in the Source pane on the
right side of the page. Drag the cartridge to a valid destination location to display
information in the Destination pane. Release the mouse button to execute the move.

The following information is displayed:

• Source
– Location coordinates in the library (Column, Tier)
– Slot type (storage, I/O Station, cleaning)
– Element address
– Cartridge label
– Encryption capability for storage cartridges (Model S4H only)
– Remaining uses for cleaning cartridges
– Media status (OK, Degraded, or Failed)
• Destination
– Status (for the tape drive)
– Slot type and element address

Note: Each column has a spring loaded mechanism that pushes the cartridges into
Tier 1. Moving a second cartridge into a column moves the first cartridge into
Tier 2. Also, cartridges cannot be moved directly from Tier 1 in one column to
Tier 2 in another column in a single move operation (intermediate move
operations are required).

Note: Cartridges cannot be moved to the Accessor using this command, however,
but can be moved from the Accessor using this command if, for example, the
library was powered OFF with a cartridge still held in the Accessor.

Unloading the Drive

a29z0117

Figure 4-33. Unload Drive screen

Use Manage Library → Unload Drive and click Unload to unload the tape cartridge
from the tape drive head.

The cartridge in the drive is unloaded from the tape head mechanism, but is still
retained inside the tape drive housing. Moving a tape cartridge from a drive to
another location both unloads and moves the cartridge in a single action.

Cleaning the Drive Manually

a29z0118

Figure 4-34. Clean Drive screen

Use Manage Library → Clean Drive to clean a drive manually. Select a cleaning
cartridge to use (from the magazine or from the I/O Station), and click Clean.

The cleaning cartridge is returned to its home position when cleaning is finished.

4-18 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Taking the Library Online/Offline

a29z0119
Figure 4-35. Library State screen
Use Manage Library → Library State to take the library online or offline. Check the
current library status, and click the button displayed to change the library status.

It is sometimes necessary to take the library offline before performing some servicing
functions for the library. Once these operations have finished, it is necessary to bring
the library back online.

Note: The tape drive is always online, even when the library is offline.

Conducting a Library Inventory

a29z0120
Figure 4-36. Inventory screen
Use Manage Library → Inventory to force the library to execute an inventory of the
cartridge magazine, accessor, and tape drive to refresh the library map. Conduct an
inventory by clicking on the Start button. The Inventory Progress bar indicates the
process in action. Wait until the operation finishes before resuming normal library
operations.
a29z0138

Figure 4-37. Inventory progress bar

An inventory is conducted automatically when power is turned ON and when the
cartridge magazine is inserted.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-19

 Configuring the Library
Managing User Access

a29z0122
Figure 4-38. User Access screen
Use Configure Library → User Access to add/modify/remove additional
administrator, superuser, and user accounts, and to change passwords. Up to 7 users
can be configured using the Web User Interface.

Add, modify, or remove users using the following information:

• Select action
– Add — To add new users.
– Modify — To change the selected user’s access role and/or password.
– Remove — To delete the selected user from the system.
• User Name — The user name of a registered user.
• Password — Case-sensitive password for the registered user.
• Role — The user access level for the registered user.
– Users are allowed to monitor the library, but not perform actions that affect the
physical library.
– Superusers are allowed to operate the physical and logical library, but not
perform actions that affect the library configuration.
– Administrator users are allowed access to the entire physical library and logical
library, including configuration. One and only one administrator user must be
assigned the login name admin.

An administrator can add/modify/remove additional administrator, superuser, and

user accounts, and change passwords. User accounts are restricted to specific areas of
the library. For more information, see “User Privileges” on page 2-8.

A User account can be modified by an administrator to provide a user with superuser

or administrator access permissions to the library functions.

Enter all user IDs and passwords on the Library Configuration form in Appendix F,
“Library Configuration Form,” on page F-1.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

4-20 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Physical Library Settings

a29z0123
Figure 4-39. Physical library settings screen
Use Configure Library → Physical to configure the I/O Station and auto cleaning.

Configure the I/O Station and Auto cleaning cartridge assignment using the
following settings:
• Library name — Use to enter a name for your library.
• Auto cleaning — Use to enable automatic cleaning of the tape drive. Auto cleaning
can be enabled only when there the number of active slots is less than the total
number of available slots in the library.
• Bar code label length — Use to choose the number of characters in the cartridge bar
code that is reported to the host computer.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Logical Library Settings

a29z0124

Figure 4-40. Logical library settings screen

Use Configure Library → Logical to configure the library access mode for the logical
library and the number of active cartridge slots.

Configure the library access mode using the following settings:

• Library mode — The library mode can be set to Random or Sequential.
– Random — In random mode, the library allows the server’s (host’s) application
software to select any data cartridge in any order.
– Sequential — In sequential mode, the library’s firmware predefines the
selection of the cartridges. After initialization, the firmware causes the library to
select the first available cartridge found (counting from the lowest Column/Tier
position through the highest cartridge position in your library) for loading into
the drive. See “Location Coordinates and Element Addresses” on page 1-8.
Loop — Sequential mode with loop mode ON loads the cartridge in the lowest
Column/Tier cartridge position after the cartridge in the highest Column/Tier

Chapter 4. Operations 4-21

 cartridge position has been filled and sent back to its home position. This allows
endless backup operations without user interaction.
Autoload — Sequential mode with autoload mode ON loads the first available
cartridge (the lowest Column/Tier cartridge position that contains a cartridge)
automatically if the library powers ON with an empty drive.
• Number of active slots — Select the number of active slots and the I/O Station
configuration you would like to assign in your library. The first digit configures the
number of active storage positions (4, 6, 8, or 9). The second digit configures
Column 5, Tier 1 of the magazine as an I/O Station (0 when disabled, and 1 when
enabled). The Auto Cleaning function can be enabled only if there is at least 1
inactive position in the magazine. If Auto Cleaning is enabled, the inactive
positions become cleaning cartridge positions.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Network Settings

a29z0125

Figure 4-41. Network settings screen

Use Configure Library → Network to set the network settings for the library.

Note: The internet protocol (IPv4, IPv6 or dual IPv4/IPv6) selection is used for the
TS2900 Tape Autoloader IP address, subnet mask, gateway address, time
server address, mail server address, SNMP trap address, and EKM server
addresses.

Configure the network using the following settings:

• Link speed — Ethernet duplex mode (Auto, 10Base-T Full, 10Base-T Half,
100Base-TX Full, 100Base-TX Half).
• TCP/IP settings — IPv4, IPv6, and dual stack IPv4/IPv6 are supported. To enable
the dual IPv4/IPv6 protocol, select both Use IPv4 and Use IPv6 and enter
parameters for both.

4-22 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 • Security — Select Enable SSL for Web to provide secure communications between
the web browser and the tape library.
• IPv4 setting — Select Use IPv4 to enable the IPv4 Internet Protocol. Select the
corresponding radio button to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) or use
static IP address settings. Enter the following parameters if using static IP address
settings.
– IPv4 address — Sets the TCP/IPv4 address of the library on the network.
– Subnet mask — Defines and limits users within a local network.
– Gateway — Allows access outside the local network.
• IPv6 setting — Select Use IPv6 to enable the IPv6 Internet Protocol. Select the
corresponding check boxes to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP), to
obtain an IP address using stateless auto configuration, or use static IP address
settings. Enter the following parameter if using static IP address settings.
– IPv6 address — Sets the TCP/IPv6 address of the library on the network.
– Prefix Length — Decimal value between 0 and 128 indicating the number of
contiguous, high-order bits comprising the network portion of the address.
– Gateway — Allows access outside the local network.
• DNS setting — Select Use DNS to use a domain name server. The DNS server, if
entered, allows the encryption, date and time, and notifications IP addresses to be
specified using hostnames instead of numerical IP addresses.
– DNS IP address — Sets the IP address of the DNS server.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Encryption Settings

a29z0126

Figure 4-42. Encryption settings screen

Use Configure Library → Encryption to configure an encryption method for data
being stored on tape cartridges. The library supports transparent library-managed

Chapter 4. Operations 4-23

 encryption by the tape drive itself (IBM Ultrium 4 Half-High Tape Drive Model
3572-S4H only) if you have purchased the Encryption Activation Key feature,
relieving the host of the burden of managing encryption applications and systems.

Note: Application Managed Encryption (AME) does not require a key. Library
Managed Encryption (LME) and System Managed Encryption (SME) require a
license key which is available by purchasing Feature Code 5901.

a29z0171
Figure 4-43. Encryption settings enabled screen
Configure encryption using the following settings:
• Feature Activation Key — Optional feature of the library to activate the encryption
functions in your library (Model S4H only).
• Security — Sets secure communications using secure sockets layer (SSL).
– Enable SSL for EKM — Select to enable secure communications between the
tape library and the EKM server.
• Primary and Secondary EKM Server Settings (library-managed encryption)
– IP address — The IP address of the primary encryption key manager. IPv4, IPv6,
and dual stack IPv4/IPv6 are supported.
– TCP port number — The TCP port number of the encryption key manager.
– SSL port number — The port number of the encryption key manager.
• Encryption method
– Application Managed — For encryption in operating environments that run an
application capable of generating and managing encryption policies and keys. If
you select application-managed encryption, no further configuration steps are
necessary.
– System Managed — For encryption in operating environments where no
application is capable of key management runs, and encryption is set up
implicitly through each instance of the IBM device driver.
– Library Managed — For transparent encryption by the TS2900 Tape Autoloader
tape drive.

4-24 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Note: System managed tape encryption and library managed tape encryption are
transparent to one another. A tape encrypted using system managed
encryption may be decrypted using library managed encryption, and vice
versa, provided both have access to the same EKM keystore.

• Encryption policy (library-managed encryption)

– Encrypt All (default) — All tape cartridges loaded into the tape drive are
encrypted.
– Internal Label - Selective Encryption — This option is used only for Symantec’s
Veritas NetBackup™.
– Internal Label - Encrypt All — This option is used only for Symantec’s Veritas
NetBackup™.
• Advanced Encryption Settings — The purpose of these advanced encryption
settings is to allow only IBM Support personnel (under the direction of the drive
development team) to provide a solution to an unforeseen problem or to support a
unique configuration. These options are not intended for use by the customer
without the guidance of IBM Support.

To determine whether a cartridge is encrypted, use Configure Library → Library

Map and select the cartridge. The screen displays whether the cartridge is encrypted,
not encrypted, or unknown.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring Date and Time Settings

a29z0170

Figure 4-44. Date and Time settings screen

Use Configure Library → Date and Time to configure the date and time settings
using one of three methods. The date and time can be automatically updated using a
remote NTP time server over the network. Alternatively, the date and time can be
synchronized with the clock on your host computer. And lastly, that date and times
can be set manually.

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader communicates with an NTP server with the following
conditions:
• client-server basis operation
• UDP (User Datagram Protocol) to access the NTP server
• does not use authentication keys
• library polling is every 12 hours

Chapter 4. Operations 4-25

 Configure the date and time using the following settings:
• NTP Server — Enables time and date control using a time server on the network.
– NTP server address — The IP address of the time server. IPv4 and IPv6
addresses are supported, depending on the TCP/IP settings. Hostnames can be
entered instead of numerical IP addresses if Use DNS is selected in the Network
settings.
– Time zone — The time zone relative to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
• If the time server is disabled, enter the local time and date manually.
– Date — The date using the MM/DD/YYYY format.
– Time — The time using the HH:MM:SS format.
• Auto Adjustment by PC — Select a time interval and click Start to synchronize the
library with the clock on your host computer at regular intervals. The Web User
Interface Java Applet must be running continuously to use this function.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring E-mail Notifications

a29z0127

Figure 4-45. E-mail settings screen

Use Configure Library → Notifications → SMTP (Mail) Settings to configure the
e-mail settings for sending event information whenever an event of a certain level
occurs.

Configure e-mail notification using the following settings:

• SMTP server address — SMTP mail server IPv4 or IPv6 address (depending on
network configuration)
• Sender address — E-mail message header information
• Subject — E-mail message header information
• Mail to — E-mail addresses of contacts to be notified of the event
• Mail event — Event level notification threshold

4-26 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 – Error events
– Error and Warning events
– Error, Warning, and Information events

Click Test to send a test message to the addresses enabled in the Mail to fields.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Configuring SNMP Trap Notifications

a29z0128
Figure 4-46. SNMP settings screen
Use Configure Library → Notifications → SNMP Settings to configure the trap
settings for sending event information whenever an event of a certain level occurs,
and to register users who are permitted to access the tape library using SNMP Version
3. The traps supported by the TS2900 Tape Autoloader are listed in “Trap Definitions
(Types)” on page B-12.

Download the SNMP MIB file for this library from http://www.ibm.com/storage/
support. Install the MIB file on your SNMP server. Refer to your server application
documentation for instructions.

Configure SNMP trap notification using the following settings:

• Community — SNMP community name (for example, “public”)
• Name — Device name (for example, “TS2900 Tape Autoloader”)
• Location — Physical location of the tape library
• Contact — Contact individual’s name
• SNMPv3 engine ID — A read-only attribute identifying the SNMPv3 engine.
• Trap event — Event level notification threshold
– Error events
– Error and Warning events

Chapter 4. Operations 4-27

 – Error, Warning, and Information events
• Trap List — IP addresses of the SNMP monitoring stations to be notified when an
event takes place and the security settings.
– Validity — Enable/Disable setting.
– Trap version — v1, v2c, or v3. For v2c and v3, the Inform checkbox determines
whether an SNMP INFORM request is sent instead of a trap event.
– IP address — IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported.
– Community (v1 or v2c) — SNMP community name.
– User name (v3 only) — SNMPv3 unique user name.
– Authentication (v3 only) — Authentication algorithm, MD5 or SHA. When an
algorithm is specified, an authentication password and confirmation of the
password are required.
– Privacy (v3 only) — Privacy service encryption and decryption algorithm, DES
or AES. When an algorithm is specified, a privacy password and confirmation of
the password are required.
• SNMPv3 User List — SNMPv3 users who are permitted to access the tape library.
– Validity — Enable/Disable setting.
– User name — SNMPv3 unique user name.
– Authentication — Authentication algorithm, MD5 or SHA. When an algorithm
is specified, an authentication password and confirmation of the password are
required.
– Privacy — Privacy service encryption and decryption algorithm, DES or AES.
When an algorithm is specified, a privacy password and confirmation of the
password are required.

Click Test to send a test trap to the IP addresses enabled in the Trap to fields.

Click Submit to transfer the settings to the library. A dialog message is displayed
when the settings have been updated successfully.

Click Refresh to read the current settings from the library.

Saving and Restoring Configuration Settings

Your library configuration can be saved and restored automatically by a cookie and
manually by using the Web User Interface. It is recommended that you use the Web
User Interface method regardless of whether or not you use the cookie method.

Important: Verify all configuration settings after restoring your library configuration.
Reset the library date and time (see “Configuring Date and Time
Settings” on page 4-25).

Saving/restoring Configuration Automatically using Cookies

If allowed by your web browser preference settings, cookies are employed to
automatically save your library configuration on your host computer and
automatically restore your library configuration if your library network configuration
uses a static IP address. The following flowchart illustrates how VPD data is saved
from and restored to a library using cookies.

4-28 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Does Auto Saved
VPD Data exist for Library
IP Address?
Yes No

VPD Data
is Saved
Does Library S/N =
Auto Saved S/N?
Yes No

VPD Data
is Saved
Write Auto
Saved VPD Data to
Library?
Yes No

Auto Saved VPD

Data is written
to Library Overwrite Auto
Saved VPD Data?
Yes No

Auto Saved Auto Saved

a29z0059
VPD Data is VPD Data is
overwritten not overwritten

Figure 4-47. Configuration using cookies

Saving/restoring Configuration Manually using Web User Interface

a29z0129

Figure 4-48. Save/Restore screen

Use Configure Library → Save/Restore to manually save library configuration
settings to an external file or restore configuration settings from a file. This function is
useful when you have several logical configurations for different tape storage
implementations that you need to switch between on a regular basis.

Note: When saving the library configuration manually, the library must be offline to
save to files and to restore from files.

Click Save to save the current settings to a file.

Click Restore to load the settings from a file.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-29

 Servicing the Library
Running Encryption Key Path Diagnostics

a29z0142
Figure 4-49. Key Path Diagnostics screen
Use Service Library → Key Path Diagnostics to run diagnostic tests of the encryption
key path if the drive in your Model S4H library is set up for library managed
encryption. These run tests for the tape drives, network connection, EKM path, and
the EKM configuration.

The test consists of four parts:

• Drive Test — This test ensures that the LDI is functioning properly.
• Ethernet Test — In this test, the library pings each EKM server IP address.
• EKM Path Test — In this test, the library performs an EKM communication test on
each EKM server IP address that passed the Ethernet Test.
• EKM Config Test — This test confirms that a drive is correctly configured in the
EKM to service key requests.

Click Start to run the diagnostics tests.

Viewing Operator Interventions

a29z0130

Figure 4-50. Operator Interventions screen

Use Service Library → Operator Interventions to display a log history summary of
information, warning, and error events that have occurred for the selected library
component units.

4-30 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 The summary can be filtered to display the operator intervention log for a specific
hardware component and specific event levels. The log is stored in memory on the
library control board. When the memory buffer is full, new events overwrite the
oldest events. The log is not cleared from memory when power is turned OFF.

Click Refresh to read the log of operator interventions from the tape library. You can
select an event in the Index List panel to display data specific to that event in the
Detail panel.

The information displayed for the operator intervention event comprises:

• Index number of the event
• Date the event occurred
• Time the event occurred
• Unit in the library where the event occurred
• Event level
• Description of the event

Viewing Library Logs

a29z0131

Figure 4-51. View Library Logs screen

Use Service Library → View Library Logs to display a log history summary of errors
that have occurred.

The error log is displayed with sense data information. The summary can be filtered
to display errors with specific sense data code types.

Click Refresh to read the log of errors from the tape library. You can select an error in
the Index List panel to display data specific to that error in the Detail panel.

The information displayed for the error comprises:

• Index number of the error
• Date and time the error occurred

Chapter 4. Operations 4-31

 • Error code
• Description of the error

There are 2 types of error data displayed in the library log with different Code
attributes:
• Library/Drive sense data (Sense key/ASC/ASCQ)
For example, a 5/3B/0D error states that an illegal request was initiated that
resulted in a “medium destination element full” error being reported by the library.
Selecting log entry 012 provides detailed sense data for this failure. Information on
sense data is listed in Appendix D, “Sense Data,” on page D-1.
• Library/Drive error code ([Code])
For example, in log entry 010, a [0222] error states that the library cannot eject
medium because drive is in state of Prevent Media Removal. Information on errors
and action to resolve the problem are listed in Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on
page B-1.
Viewing Trace Data

a29z0136

Figure 4-52. Traces screen

Use Service Library → Traces to display a trace history of errors that have occurred.
The summary can be filtered to display the type of errors occurring within a given
time period.

The system trace data for the interval entered in the Number of Minutes field is
displayed. The summary can be filtered to trace data for specific system logs.

Click Refresh to read the system trace data from the tape library.

The information displayed in the system trace data comprises:

• Index number
• Date and time of event
• Sense data

4-32 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Downloading Drive Logs

a29z0137
Figure 4-53. Download Drive Logs screen
Use Service Library → Download Drive Logs to download a tape drive dump to file
for use by support personnel to help troubleshoot a problem. You can choose to create
normal dump data (currently stored in flash) or force dump data (currently stored in
memory and moved to flash).

To download a drive log:

1. Take the library offline.
2. For each type of dump (normal or forced), click the corresponding Browse
button to display a dialog to enter a file name and to select a location to save the
drive log.
3. Click Download to download the drive log and save to a file.

Downloading Library Logs

a29z0169
Figure 4-54. Download Library Logs screen
Use Service Library → Download Library Logs to download a tape library dump to
file for use by support personnel to help troubleshoot a problem.

To download a library log:

1. Take the library offline.
2. Click Browse to display a dialog to enter a file name and to select a location to
save the library log.
3. Click Download to download the library log and save to a file.

Resetting the Library/Drive

a29z0121

Figure 4-55. Reset Library/Drive screen

Use Service Library → Reset Library/Drive to reset the library or the tape drive.

Select the target device and click Reset. The library and tape drive status is displayed.
A dialog message is displayed when the unit has been reset. The reset operation is
only fully completed when the tape library is subsequently taken online.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-33

 Updating Library and Drive Firmware

a29z0132
Figure 4-56. Firmware Update screen
Use Service Library → Firmware Update to update the library and drive firmware.

Note: It is the customer’s responsibility to maintain the library and drive firmware at
the most recent level.

To update library and drive firmware:

1. Download the latest level of firmware to your host computer by visiting
http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/index.html.
2. Unload the tape drive, if there is a cartridge in the tape drive, before updating
library and drive firmware.
3. After downloading the file, click Browse to locate the library firmware file with
extension “.fmg” (for example, TS2900_0002.0000.fmg) or the LTO SAS drive
firmware file with extension“.ro” (for example, 85F0L3AH.ro) that you
downloaded from the IBM web site, then click Update. The Web User Interface
will indicate that the operation has completed. This means that the firmware file
has been successfully moved from the host computer to the library.
4. Wait for the library to reboot before resuming normal library operations. It can
take several minutes before the library reboots.

Important: After the update process starts, you must wait until the library reboots.
Do not attempt to interrupt the process in any way, or the upgrade will
not be successful.

Note: The IBM TotalStorage Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) is a tool provided by IBM
that offers multiple functional capabilities, including updating drive and
library firmware. It is available for most major platforms and requires no
special device drivers. In addition to the executable file, a README file is
provided that describes the features and capabilities of the ITDT tool, and
gives detailed information on how to use the tool. See “Using the IBM
TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)” on page 7-1.

4-34 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Viewing Accessor Statistics

a29z0135
Figure 4-57. Usage Statistics screen
Use Service Library → Usage Statistics to view statistics information about the
movement of the robotics of the library. The information presented is:
• Motion counts — Lists the accumulated operation count for all movements,
accessor movements, picker movements, and X-axis movements.
• Retry counts — Lists the accumulated number of retries (re-attempts to load
cartridges) in the drive and the cartridges positions by the accessor.
• Error counts — Lists the accumulated number of errors for the accessor, X-axis
movements, and drive load and unload operations.

Click Refresh to read the accessor statistics from the library. The Last refresh shows
the time of the most recent library data refresh.

Chapter 4. Operations 4-35

4-36 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Media

“Data Cartridges” on page 5-2

“WORM (Write Once, Read Many)” on page 5-3
“Cleaning Cartridge” on page 5-4
“Cartridge Memory Chip (LTO-CM)” on page 5-5
“Bar Code Labels” on page 5-5
“Write-Protect Switch” on page 5-7
“Cartridge Care and Handling” on page 5-8
“Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 5-11
“Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges” on page 5-18
“Disposing of Tape Cartridges” on page 5-18
“Ordering Media Supplies” on page 5-19

To ensure that your IBM Ultrium Tape Drive conforms to IBM's specifications for
reliability, use only IBM LTO Ultrium tape cartridges. You may use other
LTO-certified data cartridges, but they may not meet the standards of reliability that
are established by IBM. Neither the IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge
(Ultrium 3) nor the IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge can be interchanged
with the media used in other IBM non-LTO Ultrium tape products.

Figure 5-1 shows the IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge and its components.

Figure 5-1. IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Cartridge

1 LTO cartridge memory 4 Write-protect Switch

2 Cartridge door 5 Label area
3 Leader Pin 6 Insertion guide

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 5-1

Data Cartridges
The different generations of IBM Ultrium data cartridges can be identified by color:
Table 5-1. Ultrium data cartridges
Type Color
Ultrium 4 Green
Ultrium 4 WORM Green and Silvery gray
Ultrium 3 Slate Blue
Ultrium 3 WORM Slate Blue and Silvery gray
Ultrium 2 Purple
Ultrium 1 Black

All generations contain 1/2-inch, dual-coat, metal-particle tape.

You can order tape cartridges with the bar code labels included, or you can order
custom labels. To obtain tape cartridges and bar code labels, see “Ordering Media
Supplies” on page 5-19.

When processing tape in the cartridges, Ultrium Tape Drives use a linear, serpentine
recording format. The native data capacity and recording format of Ultrium data
cartridges is as follows:

Table 5-2. Data capacity and recording format

Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format
Ultrium 4 800 GB (1600 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 896 tracks,
sixteen tracks at a time.
Ultrium 3 400 GB (800 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 704 tracks,
sixteen tracks at a time.
Ultrium 2 200 GB (400 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 512 tracks,
eight tracks at a time.
Ultrium 1 100 GB (200 GB at 2:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 384 tracks,
eight tracks at a time.

The first set of tracks (sixteen for Ultrium 4 and 3; eight for Ultrium 2 and 1) is written
from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape. The head then
repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass. This process continues until all
tracks are written and the cartridge is full, or until all data is written.

The cartridge door 2 protects the tape from contamination when the cartridge is out
of the drive. The tape is attached to a leader pin 3 behind the door. When the
cartridge is inserted into the drive, a threading mechanism pulls the pin (and tape)
out of the cartridge, across the drive head, and onto a non-removable take-up reel.
The head can then read or write data from or to the tape.

The write-protect switch 4 prevents data from being written to the tape cartridge.
For more information, see “Write-Protect Switch” on page 5-7.

The label area 5 provides a location to place a label. For more information, see “Bar
Code Labels” on page 5-5.

5-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 The insertion guide 6 is a large, notched area that prevents the cartridge from being
inserted incorrectly.

Generation 3 and 4 of the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge have a nominal cartridge life
of 20,000 (20k) load and unload cycles. Generation 2 has a nominal cartridge life of
10,000 (10k) load and unload cycles. Generation 1 of the LTO Ultrium Data Cartridge
has a nominal cartridge life of 5000 (5k) load and unload cycles.

Cartridge Compatibility
Table 5-3. Ultrium data and cleaning cartridge compatibility with Ultrium tape drive
IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges
IBM Ultrium
Tape Drive 800 GB 400 GB 200GB 100GB
(Ultrium 4) (Ultrium 3) (Ultrium 2) (Ultrium 1)
Ultrium 4 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Ultrium 3 Read/Write Read/Write Read only
Ultrium 2 Read/Write Read/Write
Ultrium 1 Read/Write

Note: The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the Ultrium 3 (3572-3SH) and Ultrium 4
(3572-4SH) Tape Drives only.

Capacity Scaling
To control the capacity of the cartridge (for example, to obtain a faster seek time) issue
the SCSI command SET CAPACITY. For information about this command, refer to the
IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.

WORM (Write Once, Read Many)

Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once, Read
Many (WORM) method for storing data on tape. The LTO Ultrium generation 4 drive
enables WORM support when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive.

WORM Media
Because standard read/write media are incompatible with the WORM feature, a
specially formatted WORM tape cartridge (see Figure 5-2) is required. Each WORM
cartridge has a unique, worldwide cartridge identifier (WWCID), which comprises
the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape media serial number. Ultrium
4 WORM cartridges are two-tone green and silvery-gray. See “Ordering Media
Supplies” on page 5-19 for information on how to choose and purchase the
appropriate WORM tape cartridges for your library.

Chapter 5. Media 5-3

Figure 5-2. Ultrium WORM Tape Cartridge

Data Security on WORM Media

Certain built-in security measures help ensure that the data written on a WORM
cartridge does not become compromised, for example:
• The format of an Ultrium 4 800 GB or Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Cartridge is
unlike that of standard read/write media. This unique format prevents a drive that
lacks WORM-capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge.
• When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the changing or
altering of user data already written on the tape. The firmware keeps track of the
last appendable point on the tape.

WORM Media Errors

The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur:
• Information in the servo manufacturer’s word (SMW) on the tape must match
information from the cartridge memory (CM) module in the cartridge. If it does not
match, a media Error Code 7 will post on the drive’s single-character display
(SCD). An error will also be displayed on the Operator Panel.
• Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not WORM capable causes the
cartridge to be treated as an unsupported medium. The drive will report a media
Error Code 7. Upgrading the drive firmware to the correct code level will resolve
the problem.

Requirements for WORM Capability

To add WORM capability to your LTO Ultrium generation 4 drive(s), you need to
have the drive firmware to the correct code level, and use either Ultrium 4 800 GB
WORM tape cartridges or Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM tape cartridges (see “Ordering
Media Supplies” on page 5-19).

Cleaning Cartridge
An IBM Ultrium Universal Cleaning Cartridge is required to clean the tape drive. The
drive itself determines when it needs to be cleaned and notifies the library. When
notified, the library indicates that the drive needs cleaning by turning ON the “Clean
Drive” LED on the front panel of the library and posting a message on the library
display.

A stand-alone tape drive requires manual insertion of the cleaning cartridge. A tape
drive within a library requires the use of a library menu function to either
automatically or manually clean the tape drive.

5-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Important: It is recommended that the drive be cleaned only when it is requested by
the drive.

The IBM Ultrium Universal Cleaning Cartridge is valid for 50 uses. The cartridge’s
LTO-CM (Cartridge Memory) chip tracks the number of times that the cartridge is
used.

Note: The drive will automatically eject an expired cleaning cartridge.

Cartridge Memory Chip (LTO-CM)

All generations of the IBM LTO Ultrium Data Cartridges include a Linear Tape-Open
Cartridge Memory (LTO-CM) chip ( 1 in Figure 5-1 on page 5-1), that contains
information about the cartridge and the tape (such as the name of the manufacturer
that created the tape), as well as statistical information about the cartridge’s use. The
LTO-CM enhances the efficiency of the cartridge. For example, the LTO-CM stores the
end-of-data location which, when the next time this cartridge is inserted and the
Write command is issued, enables the drive to quickly locate the recording area and
begin recording. The LTO-CM also aids in determining the reliability of the cartridge
by storing data about its age, how many times it has been loaded, and how many
errors it has accumulated. Whenever a tape cartridge is unloaded, the tape drive
writes any pertinent information to the cartridge memory.

The storage capacity of the LTO Generation 4 LTO-CM is 8160 bytes. LTO Generations
1, 2, and 3 have an LTO-CM capacity of 4096 bytes.

Bar Code Labels

A bar code label contains:
• A volume serial number (VOLSER) that is human-readable
• A bar code that the library can read

Note: The tape drive does not require bar code labels, but you should use labels for
tape cartridge identification purposes.

Table 5-4. Bar code label requirements for the Ultrium tape drive and library
Ultrium Tape Drive/Library Bar Code Label Requirements
3572 Required
3573 Required
3576 Required
3580 Not required
3581 Required with optional Bar Code Reader
3582 Required
3583 Required
3584 Required

When read by a library’s bar code reader, the bar code identifies the cartridge’s
VOLSER to the library. The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a
data cartridge or cleaning cartridge. In addition, the bar code includes the
two-character media-type identifier Lx, where x equals 1, 2, 3, or 4. L identifies the
cartridge as an LTO cartridge and the number represents the generation of cartridge

Chapter 5. Media 5-5

 for that cartridge type. Figure 5-3 on page 5-6 shows a sample bar code label for the
LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge.

Tape cartridges can be ordered with the labels included or with custom labels. To
order tape cartridges and bar code labels, see “Ordering Media Supplies” on
page 5-19. The bar code for usage in the LTO tape library must meet predefined
specifications. They include (but are not limited to):
• Six or eight (the default) uppercase alphanumeric characters, where the last two
characters must be L4, L3, L2, or L1
• Label and printing to be non-glossy
• Nominal narrow line or space width of 0.423 mm (0.017 in.)
• Wide to narrow ratio of 2.75:1
• Minimum bar length of 11.1 mm (0.44 in.)

Table 5-5. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the Ultrium 3 and Ultrium 4 Tape Drive
Cartridges VOLSER
Ultrium 4 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL4
Ultrium 4 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLU
Ultrium 3 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL3
Ultrium 3 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLT
Ultrium 2 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL2
Ultrium 1 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL1
IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge CLNxxxLx
* An Ultrium 3 Tape Drive must have a minimum firmware level of 54xx for it to
be compatible with the WORM cartridge.

To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label, visit
the web at http://www.ibm.com/storage/lto, (select LTO Support), or contact your
IBM Sales Representative.

When attaching a bar code label to a tape cartridge, place the label only in the
recessed label area ( 4 in Figure 5-1 on page 5-1). A label that extends outside of the
recessed area can cause loading problems in the drive.

Note: Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the bar code.
A mark in this area may prevent the library from reading the label.

L T O 1 2 3 L4
a69i0349

Figure 5-3. Sample bar code label on the LTO Ultrium 4 Tape Cartridge

5-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 The volume serial number (LTO123), cartridge type (L4), and bar code are printed on
the label.

Guidelines for Using Bar Code Labels

Apply the following guidelines whenever using bar code labels:
• Use only IBM-approved bar code labels on cartridges to be used in an IBM tape
library.
• Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label.
• Before you apply a new label, remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a right
angle to the cartridge case.
• Use peel-clean labels that do not leave a residue after being removed. If there is
glue residue on the cartridge, remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger. Do
not use a sharp object, water, or a chemical to clean the label area.
• Examine the label before applying it to the cartridge. Do not use the label if it has
voids or smears in the printed characters or bar code (a library’s inventory
operation will take much longer if the bar code label is not readable).
• Remove the label from the label sheet carefully. Do not stretch the label or cause the
edges to curl.
• Position the label within the recessed label area ( 5 in Figure 5-1 on page 5-1).
• With light finger pressure, smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist on
its surface.
• Verify that the label is smooth and parallel, and has no roll-up or roll-over. The
label must be flat to within 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) over the length of the label and have
no folds, missing pieces, or smudges.
• Do not place other machine-readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge. They
may interfere with the ability of the drive to load the cartridge.

Write-Protect Switch
The position of the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge ( 1 in Figure 5-4)
determines whether you can write to the tape. If the switch is set to:
• The locked position (solid red), data cannot be written to the tape.
• The unlocked position (black void), data can be written to the tape.

If possible, use your server’s application software to write-protect your cartridges

(rather than manually setting the write-protect switch). This allows the server’s
software to identify a cartridge that no longer contains current data and is eligible to
become a scratch (blank) data cartridge. Do not write-protect scratch (blank)
cartridges; the tape drive will not be able to write new data to them.

If you must manually set the write-protect switch, slide it left or right to the desired
position.

Chapter 5. Media 5-7

 a67e0026
1

Figure 5-4. Setting the write-protect switch

Cartridge Care and Handling

Note: Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive. A damaged cartridge
can interfere with the reliability of a drive and may void the warranties of the
drive and the cartridge. Before inserting a tape cartridge, inspect the cartridge
case, cartridge door, and write-protect switch for breaks.

Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their

magnetic tape. To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the continued
high reliability of your IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Drives, use the following guidelines:

Provide Training
• Post procedures that describe proper media handling in places where people
gather.
• Ensure that anyone who handles tape has been properly trained in handling and
shipping procedures. This includes operators, users, programmers, archival
services, and shipping personnel.
• Ensure that any service or contract personnel who perform archiving are properly
trained in media-handling procedures.
• Include media-handling procedures as part of any services contract.
• Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures.

Ensure Proper Packaging

• When shipping a cartridge, use the original or better packaging.
• Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case.
• Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in its
jewel case during transportation. Ultrium Turtlecases (by Perm-A-Store) have been
tested and found to be satisfactory (see Figure 5-5). They are available at
http://www.turtlecase.com/.

5-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 a69i0077
Figure 5-5. Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase
• Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope. Always place it in a box
or package.
• If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material, ensure
the following:
– Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from dust,
moisture, and other contaminants.
– Pack the cartridge snugly; do not allow it to move around.
– Double-box the cartridge (place it inside a box, then place that box inside the
shipping box) and add padding between the two boxes (see Figure 5-6).

Figure 5-6. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping

Chapter 5. Media 5-9

 Provide Proper Acclimation and Environmental Conditions
• Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24
hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will
vary, depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was
exposed).
• Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it.
• Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.
• Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater than
100 oersteds (for example, terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray equipment,
or fields that exist near high-current cables or power supplies). Such exposure can
cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge unusable.
• Maintain the conditions that are described in “Environmental and Shipping
Specifications for Tape Cartridges” on page 5-18.

Perform a Thorough Inspection

After purchasing a cartridge and before using it, perform the following steps:
• Inspect the cartridge’s packaging to determine potential rough handling.
• When inspecting a cartridge, open only the cartridge door. Do not open any other
part of the cartridge case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held together
with screws; separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge.
• Inspect the cartridge for damage before using or storing it.
• Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that loads first into the tape load
compartment) and ensure that there are no gaps in the seam of the cartridge case
( 1 in Figure 5-7 and 4 in Figure 5-9 on page 5-13). If there are gaps in the seam
(see Figure 5-7), the leader pin may be dislodged. Go to “Repositioning or
Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 5-11.

Figure 5-7. Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge

• Check that the leader pin is properly seated (see 2 in Figure 5-8).
• If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable, copy
any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery. Discard the
mishandled cartridge.

5-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 • Review handling and shipping procedures.

Handle the Cartridge Carefully

• Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge door back and
ensure that the leader pin is properly seated in the pin-retaining spring clips (see 2
in Figure 5-8). If the leader pin has become dislodged, go to “Repositioning or
Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 5-11.
• Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage the
tape’s surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write reliability. Pulling
on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake mechanism
in the cartridge.
• Do not stack more than six cartridges.
• Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing makes the tape
unusable.

Examples of Cartridge Problems

Example: Split Cartridge Case (see Figure 5-7)

The cartridge’s case is damaged. There is a high possibility of media damage and
potential loss. Perform the following steps:
1. Look for cartridge mishandling.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly seat
the pin (see “Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 5-11). Then,
immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss.
3. Review media-handling procedures.

Example: Improper Placement of Leader Pin (see Figure 5-8)

The leader pin is misaligned. Perform the following steps:

1. Look for cartridge damage.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly seat
the pin (see “Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin” on page 5-11). Then,
immediately use data recovery procedures to minimize chances of data loss.

Repositioning or Reattaching a Leader Pin

Note: Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to another
cartridge. Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties of
the drive and the cartridge.

If the leader pin in your cartridge becomes dislodged from its pin-retaining spring
clips or detaches from the tape, you must use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit
(part number 08L9129) to reposition or reattach it. (Do not reattach the pin if you
must remove more than seven meters (23 feet) of leader tape.) The sections that follow
describe each procedure.

Note: Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to another
cartridge. Continued use of a repaired cartridge may void the warranties of
the drive and the cartridge.

Chapter 5. Media 5-11

 Repositioning a Leader Pin
A leader pin that is improperly seated inside a cartridge can interfere with the
operation of the drive. Figure 5-8 shows a leader pin in the incorrect 1 and correct 2
positions.

To place the leader pin in its proper position, you will need the following tools:
• Plastic or blunt-end tweezers
• Cartridge manual rewind tool (from Leader Pin Reattachment Kit, part number
08L9129)

Figure 5-8. Leader pin in the incorrect and correct positions

The cartridge door is open and the leader pin is visible inside the cartridge.

To reposition the leader pin, perform the following steps.

1. Slide open the cartridge door ( 1 in Figure 5-9) and locate the leader pin 2 (you
may need to shake the cartridge gently to roll the pin toward the door).
2. With plastic or blunt-end tweezers, grasp the leader pin and position it in the
pin-retaining spring clips 3 .
3. Press the leader pin gently into the clips until it snaps into place and is firmly
seated.
4. Close the cartridge door.

5-12 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Figure 5-9. Placing the dislodged leader pin into the correct position
The cartridge door is open to show the leader pin.

5. To rewind the tape, insert the cartridge manual rewind tool ( 1 in Figure 5-10)
into the cartridge’s hub 2 and turn it clockwise until the tape becomes taut.

Figure 5-10. Rewinding the tape into the cartridge

6. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge.
7. If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable, copy
any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery. Discard
the mishandled cartridge.

Reattaching a Leader Pin

The first meter of tape in a cartridge is leader tape. Once the leader tape has been
removed there is a possibility of tape breakage. After reattaching the leader pin,
transfer data from the defective tape cartridge. Do not reuse the defective tape
cartridge.

Chapter 5. Media 5-13

 The Leader Pin Reattachment Kit contains three parts:
• Leader pin attach tool ( 1 in Figure 5-11). A plastic brace that holds the cartridge
door open.
• Cartridge manual rewind tool ( 2 in Figure 5-11). A device that fits into the
cartridge’s hub and lets you wind the tape into and out of the cartridge.
• Pin supplies ( 3 in Figure 5-11). Leader pins and C-clips.

Note:
• Use only the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit to reattach the leader pin to the
tape. Other methods of reattaching the pin will damage the tape, the drive, or both.
• Use this procedure on your tape cartridge only when the leader pin detaches from
the magnetic tape and you must copy the cartridge’s data onto another cartridge.
Destroy the damaged cartridge after you copy the data. This procedure may affect
the performance of the leader pin during threading and unloading operations.
• Touch only the end of the tape. Touching the tape in an area other than the end can
damage the tape’s surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write
reliability.

a67e0042

Figure 5-11. Leader Pin Reattachment Kit

To reattach a leader pin by using the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit:
1. Attach the leader pin attach tool ( 1 in Figure 5-12) to the cartridge 2 so that the
tool’s hook 3 latches into the cartridge’s door 4 . Pull the tool back to hold the
door open, then slide the tool onto the cartridge. Open the tool’s pivot arm 5 .

5-14 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 a67e0033
Figure 5-12. Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge
To hold the cartridge door open, hook the tool into the door and pull the tool
back.
2. To find the end of the tape inside the cartridge, attach the cartridge manual
rewind tool ( 1 in Figure 5-13) to the cartridge’s hub 2 by fitting the tool’s teeth
between the teeth of the hub. Turn the tool clockwise until you see the end of the
tape inside the cartridge. Then, slowly turn the rewind tool counterclockwise to
bring the tape edge toward the cartridge door 3 .
3. Continue to turn the rewind tool counterclockwise until approximately 13 cm (5
in.) of tape hangs from the cartridge door. If necessary, grasp the tape and pull
gently to unwind it from the cartridge.
4. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge. Set the tool and
the cartridge aside.

Chapter 5. Media 5-15

 a67e0035
Figure 5-13. Winding the tape out of the cartridge
Turn the cartridge manual rewind tool clockwise to see the end of the tape, then
turn it counterclockwise to bring the tape to the cartridge door.
5. On the leader pin ( 1 in Figure 5-14), locate the open side of the C-clip 2 . The
C-clip is a small black part that secures the tape 3 to the pin.
6. Remove the C-clip from the leader pin by using your fingers to push the clip
away from the pin. Set the pin aside and discard the clip.

3
1
a67e0036

Figure 5-14. Removing the C-clip from the leader pin

Use your fingers to push the C-clip from the leader pin.
7. Position the tape in the alignment groove of the leader pin attach tool ( 1 in
Figure 5-15).
8. Place a new C-clip into the retention groove ( 2 in Figure 5-15) on the leader pin
attachment tool and make sure that the clip’s open side faces up.
9. Place the leader pin (from step 6) into the cavity ( 3 in Figure 5-15) of the leader
pin attach tool.

Note: To prevent the leader pin from rolling into the cartridge, in the following
step use care when folding the tape over the pin.

10. Fold the tape over the leader pin and hold it with your fingers (see Figure 5-15).

Note: Use care to ensure that the tape is centered over the leader pin. Failure to
properly center the tape on the pin will cause the repaired cartridge to fail.

5-16 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 When the tape is properly centered, a 0.25-mm (0.01-in.) gap exists on
both sides of the pin.

1
4

Figure 5-15. Attaching the leader pin to the tape a67e0037

11. Close the pivot arm 4 of the leader pin attach tool by swinging it over the leader
pin so that the C-clip snaps onto the pin and the tape.
12. Swing the pivot arm open and trim the excess tape 5 so that it is flush with the
reattached leader pin 6 .
13. Use your fingers to remove the leader pin from the cavity 3 in the leader pin
attach tool.
14. Use the cartridge manual rewind tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge
(wind the tape clockwise). Ensure that the leader pin is latched by the
pin-retaining spring clips on each end of the leader pin.
15. Remove the rewind tool.
16. Remove the leader pin attach tool by lifting its end up and away from the
cartridge.

Chapter 5. Media 5-17

Environmental and Shipping Specifications for Tape Cartridges
Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours
or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will vary,
depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was exposed).

The best storage container for the cartridges (until they are opened) is the original
shipping container. The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the
cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes.

When you ship a cartridge, place it in its jewel case or in a sealed, moisture-proof bag
to protect it from moisture, contaminants, and physical damage. Ship the cartridge in
a shipping container that has enough packing material to cushion the cartridge and
prevent it from moving within the container.

Table 5-6 gives the environment for operating, storing, and shipping LTO Ultrium
Tape Cartridges.

Table 5-6. Environment for operating, storing, and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge
Environmental Specifications
Environmental
Factor Operational Archival
Operating Shipping
Storage1 Storage2
10 to 45ºC 16 to 32ºC 16 to 25ºC -23 to 49ºC
Temperature
(50 to 113ºF) (61 to 90ºF) (61 to 77ºF) (-9 to 120ºF)
Relative humidity
10 to 80% 20 to 80% 20 to 50% 5 to 80%
(non-condensing)
Maximum wet bulb
26ºC (79ºF) 26ºC (79ºF) 26ºC (79ºF) 26ºC (79ºF)
temperature
Note:
1. The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six
months.
2. The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to ten
years.

Disposing of Tape Cartridges

Under the current rules of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
regulation 40CFR261, the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge is classified as non-hazardous
waste. As such, it may be disposed of in the same way as normal office trash. These
regulations are amended from time to time, and you should review them at the time
of disposal.

If your local, state, country (non-U.S.A.), or regional regulations are more restrictive
than EPA 40CFR261, you must review them before you dispose of a cartridge. Contact
your account representative for information about the materials that are in the
cartridge.

If a tape cartridge must be disposed of in a secure manner, you can erase the data on
the cartridge by using a high-energy ac degausser (use a minimum of 4000 oersted
peak field over the entire space that the cartridge occupies). The tape should make
two passes through the field at 90 degree orientation change for each pass to achieve
complete erasure. Some commercial degaussers have two magnetic field regions

5-18 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 offset 90 degrees from each other to accomplish complete erasure in one pass for
higher throughput. Degaussing makes the cartridge unusable.

If you burn the cartridge and tape, ensure that the incineration complies with all
applicable regulations.

Ordering Media Supplies

Table 5-7 lists the cartridges and media supplies that you can order for the drive.

Table 5-7. Media supplies

Supply Item Methods of Ordering
20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Cartridge (with attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 010. Specify the VOLSER
characters that you want.
Order as part number 95P4443 (color label) or
95P4445 (black and white label) through an
IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
20-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Cartridge (without attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 011.
Order as part number 95P4447 through an
IBM-authorized distributor.
5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 800 GB Data Order as part number 95P4278 through an
Cartridge IBM-authorized distributor.
20-PACK IBM Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Tape Cartridge (with attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 032.
Order as part number 95P4457 (color label) or
95P4459 (black and white label) through an
IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
20-PACK IBM Ultrium 4 800 GB WORM Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Tape Cartridge (without attached labels) Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 033.
Order as part number 95P4461 through an
IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Bar code labels are pre-applied to cartridges. Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 008. Specify the VOLSER
characters that you want.
Order as part number 96Pxxxx (color label) or
96Pxxxx (black and white label) through an
IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.

Chapter 5. Media 5-19

 Table 5-7. Media supplies (continued)
Supply Item Methods of Ordering
IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Order VOLSER labels separately. Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 009.
Order as part number 24Rxxxx through an
IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
5-PACK IBM LTO Ultrium 400 GB Data Order as part number 95P2020 through an
Cartridge IBM-authorized distributor. Specify the
VOLSER characters that you want.
IBM Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Order by Machine Type/Model and Feature
Cartridge (with attached labels) Code through an IBM-authorized distributor.
IBM TotalStorage 3589 Model 028/Feature
Code 2820 is a 20-pack of WORM cartridges
labeled with starting volume serial
information and, optionally, packed in
individual jewel cases. Attached labels have
been preprinted with a Bar Code that ends
with LT, where L stands for LTO, and T
identifies the cartridge as a WORM cartridge.
This media can be used with LTO 3 drives
(read/write).
IBM Ultrium 3 400 GB WORM Tape Order by Machine Type/Model and Feature
Cartridge (without attached labels) Code through an IBM-authorized distributor.
IBM TotalStorage 3589 Model 029/Feature
Code 2920 is a 20-pack of WORM cartridges
packed in individual jewel cases with
unattached blank labels. This media can be
used with LTO 3 drives (read/write).
IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Bar code labels are pre-applied to cartridges. Representative or any authorized IBM
Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 006. Specify VOLSER characters
you want.
IBM LTO Ultrium 200 GB Data Cartridge Order the cartridge from your IBM Sales
Order VOLSER labels separately (see Representative or any authorized IBM
“Ordering Bar Code Labels” on page 5-21). Business Partner by specifying Machine Type
3589 Model 007.
IBM LTO Ultrium 100 GB Data Cartridge Order as part number 08L9120 through an
Order VOLSER labels separately (see IBM-authorized distributor.
“Ordering Bar Code Labels” on page 5-21).
IBM LTO Ultrium Cleaning Cartridge Order as part number 35L2086 through an
(Universal cleaning cartridge for use with IBM-authorized distributor.
Ultrium 1, Ultrium 2, and Ultrium 3 drives)
VOLSER labels are included.
Leader Pin Reattachment Kit Order as part number 08L9129 through an
IBM-authorized distributor.
Manual Rewind Tool Order as part number 08L9130 through an
IBM-authorized distributor.

To find the closest IBM-authorized distributor, visit the web at

http://www.ibm.com/storage/media) or call 1-888-IBM-MEDIA.

5-20 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Ordering Bar Code Labels
The LTO Ultrium 3 and 4 Tape Drives do not require cartridge bar code labels.
However, if you use your data cartridges or cleaning cartridges in an IBM tape library
product, you may need cartridge bar code labels if your tape library product requires
them. You can order these labels separately from the IBM Data Cartridges and
Cleaning Cartridges.

You can order bar code labels directly from the authorized label suppliers in Table 5-8.

Table 5-8. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels

In America In Europe and Asia
EDP/Tri-Optic EDP Europe, Ltd.
6800 West 117th Avenue 43 Redhills Road
Broomfield, CO 80020 South Woodham Ferrers
U. S. A. Chelmsford, Essex CM3 5UL
Telephone: 888-438-8362 U. K.
http://www.tri-optic.com/ Telephone: 44 (0) 1245-322380
http://www.tri-optic.com/
Dataware Digital Tape Solutions
P.O. Box 740947 12 Ashley St.
Houston, TX 77274 Chatswood, NSW 2067
U. S. A. Australia
Telephone: 800-426-4844 Telephone: (02) 9496-1111
http://www.datawarelabels.com/ http://www.datawarelabels.com/
Netc, L.L.C. Netc Europe Ltd
P. O. Box 320784 The Old Surgery
Fairfield, CT 06432 5a The Pavement
U. S. A. North Curry, Taunton
Telephone: 203-372-6382 Somerset TA3 6LX
http://www.netclabels.com/ U. K.
Telephone: 44 (0) 1823 49 1439
http://www.netclabels.co.uk/
Netc Asia Pacific Pty Ltd
P.O. Box 609 Windsor, NSW 2756
Australia
Telephone: 61 (0) 2 4577 3793
http://www.netclabels.com.au/

Chapter 5. Media 5-21

5-22 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Chapter 6. Troubleshooting

“How the Library Reports Problems” on page 6-1

“Library Error Message Content” on page 6-2
“Diagnosing a Problem” on page 6-3
“Isolating Problems” on page 6-6
“Interpreting Front Panel LEDs” on page 6-8
“Reseating Cables” on page 6-10
“E-mailing Logs” on page 6-10

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader is a customer replaceable unit (CRU). The customer is
responsible for the setup and maintenance of the library. Warranty replacement of the
TS2900 Tape Autoloader, if required, is provided by exchanging the old unit with a
new unit. The customer will be charged for on-site service if a service contract is not
in place.

When an error occurs during operation of the library, the library stops the current
operation and displays an error code on the Operator Panel. Unless otherwise noted,
try to resolve the problem by cycling power to the library and retrying the last
operation.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is switched
OFF before powering ON again.

Before placing a service call or informing IBM Technical Support, observe the LEDs
on the front panel and error messages on the Operator Panel to determine exactly
which part is failing. See “Interpreting Front Panel LEDs” on page 6-8 for more
information. If the LEDs on all components are functioning properly, see “Diagnosing
a Problem” on page 6-3.

How the Library Reports Problems

The library uses advanced problem detection, reporting, and notification technology
to alert customers of problems as soon as they occur. It performs numerous self-tests
to monitor the library’s temperature, voltage and currents, and standard library
operations. These tests monitor the library when the library is powered ON, and
during normal operation when the library is idle.

If the test detects a problem, the library generates a message that identifies which
component is likely causing the problem. The library’s Error LED and Attention LED
may turn ON to indicate an abnormal state. If the problem is not severe, the Attention
LED turns ON and the library continues to provide full functionality to the library. If
the problem is not recoverable, the Error LED turns ON and an error message is
displayed on the Operator Panel.

When the library generates an attention event or an error event, support staff can be
notified immediately by setting up e-mail event notification and/or SNMP trap
notification. The type of event that generates e-mail notification or SNMP trap
notification can be selected to limit the number of events to a specific priority level.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 6-1

 Customers can frequently resolve a simple problem themselves by using the
information found in “Diagnosing a Problem” on page 6-3. If the problem is
unrecoverable, the customer must contact IBM Technical Support (see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-1).

Library Error Message Content

When a library event occurs, the event is logged into Flash memory on the Library
Control Board.

The library error log can be viewed on the Operator Panel by selecting Service →
View Error Status. The log lists all of the library error messages in the order in which
they occurred, starting with the most recent at the top.

The Web User Interface can display a log history summary of information, warning,
and error events that have occurred by selecting Service Library → Operator
Interventions. The summary can be filtered to display the operator intervention log
for a specific hardware component and specific event levels. The log is stored in
memory on the Library Control Board. When the memory buffer is full, new events
overwrite the oldest events. The log is not cleared from memory when power is
turned OFF. The information displayed in the Detail panel for the selected operator
intervention event comprises:
• Index number of the event
• Date the event occurred
• Time the event occurred
• Unit in the library where the event occurred
• Event level
• Description of the event

The Web User Interface can also display a log history summary of errors that have
occurred by selecting Service Library → View Library Logs. The error log is
displayed with sense data information. The summary can be filtered to display errors
with specific sense data code types. The information displayed in the Detail panel for
the selected error comprises:
• Index number of the error
• Date and time the error occurred
• Error code
• Description of the error

6-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Diagnosing a Problem

Problem Area If… Then…

Cartridge A cartridge is not ejecting 1. Try unloading the drive (Operator Panel: Commands →
from the drive… Unload).
2. Power cycle the library.
3. If the cartridge does not eject from the drive, see “Contacting
IBM Technical Support” on page 7-1.
The cartridge case or tape Replace the tape cartridge.
inside the cartridge is
damaged…
Your cleaning cartridge Replace the cleaning cartridge.
expires…
A bar code label cannot be 1. Export the suspect cartridge from the library.
read by the bar code 2. Confirm that the bar code label is not damaged or missing.
reader… Replace the bar code label, if necessary.
3. Import the cartridge back into the library.
4. Inventory the library.
a. If no errors are reported, resume normal library
operations.
b. If an error is reported, see Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on
page B-1.
Cartridge Magazine The magazine will not 1. Power cycle the library.
unlock after issuing the 2. Try unlocking the magazine again (Operator Panel: Unlock
Unlock Magazine Magazine).
command from the a. If the magazine does not unlock, see “Unlocking the
Operator Panel… Cartridge Magazine Manually” on page 8-1.
b. If the magazine does unlock, resume normal library
operations.
The magazine can only be 1. Verify that you have requested the library to unlock the entire
partially removed from the magazine, not just the I/O Station (if enabled) then retry the
library… operation.
The magazine seems stuck 2. Carefully pull the magazine out of the library. Stop if you feel
on something inside the any resistance (as if something is blocking the magazine
library… inside the library).
3. If the magazine still cannot be removed from the library, see
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Communication You are experiencing 1. If you have a recent backup of your configuration, proceed to
Functions difficulty exercising some the next step. If you do not, try to save one now (Web User
library functions (for Interface: Configure Library → Save/Restore).
example, updating 2. If using a static IP address, make note of your library’s IP
firmware or logging in to address. If using DHCP, proceed to the next step.
the library remotely)… 3. Restore factory defaults (Operator Panel: Configuration →
Set Default).
4. If using a static IP address, disable DHCP (the default setting)
and enter the library IP address (Web User Interface:
Configure Library → Network; Operator Panel:
Configuration → Configure Network Settings). If using
DHCP, proceed to the next step.
5. Restore the library configuration (Web User Interface:
Configure Library → Save/Restore).

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-3

Problem Area If… Then…
Encryption Encryption error displayed 1. Check the host application to ensure the host application is
when the drive detects an providing the correct encryption key.
error associated with an a. Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers and the IBM LTO
encryption operation, if the Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference for the Sense Data
problem occurred while the returned for an encryption operation.
tape drive was writing data b. Retry the encryption operation after the host application
to, or reading data from, problems have been resolved.
tape…
2. Reset the drive.
a. Refer to the error code displayed on the Operator Panel if
the drive resets and POST fails.
b. Retry the encryption operation if the drive resets and
POST completes without errors.
3. Ensure the correct media is being used. Data encryption is
supported with LTO Ultrium 4 Data Cartridges only.
Encryption-related error is Check the host application’s error logs, device driver logs, tape
posted… library error logs, and tape drive error logs for entries that are
related to encryption.
Connection problem with If you are using library-managed encryption, perform the Key
the Encryption Key Path Diagnostic. If the test fails, a problem could exist with the IP
Manager (EKM)… address, the Ethernet cable, or the EKM server. Perform the
following:
1. Check the Ethernet connection between the library and the
EKM server.
2. Check the TCP/IP configuration of the library and the server.
3. Check that the EKM is correctly installed and configured, and
that the EKM application is properly started (refer to your
EKM documentation).
4. Ensure that the tape drive is registered in the EKM (refer to
your EKM documentation).
5. Ensure that a default key label is defined in the EKM (refer to
your EKM documentation).
If you are using application-managed encryption or
system-managed encryption, check your key proxy server’s
documentation for a similar test.
Lost Encryption Feature 1. Visit https://www.ibm.com/support/dsfa/.
license key… 2. Enter your machine type, serial number, and worldwide
node name to display your encryption license key.

6-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Problem Area If… Then…
Error Codes or The library issued an error 1. Make note of the error code.
TapeAlert Flags code… 2. Power cycle the library.
An error message was a. If the error reoccurs, see Appendix B, “Error Codes,” on
received via email page B-1.
notification (if enabled)… b. If the error does not reoccur, resume normal library
operations.
A TapeAlert flag was 1. Make note of the TapeAlert flag.
received… 2. Power cycle the library.
a. If the TapeAlert reoccurs, see Appendix C, “TapeAlert
Flags,” on page C-1.
b. If the TapeAlert does not reoccur, resume normal library
operations.
The error code represents See “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-1.
an unrecoverable error…
You get repeated errors… 1. Reset the library.
2. If the library is still reporting errors, power cycle the library.
If no errors are reported, resume normal library operations.
3. If the library still fails, reset factory defaults. If no errors are
reported, resume normal library operations.
4. If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-1.
You are experiencing a 1. Run Library Verify to identify and resolve the problem. See
problem with your library “Running Library Verify Diagnostics” on page 4-12.
and no error code was 2. If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM Technical
created… Support” on page 7-1.
Firmware The Library firmware does Failure of the login screen to appear on the Operator Panel in 15
not complete the boot-up minutes indicates that the boot-up process is not completing.
process and appears hung… 1. Power OFF the library and wait at least one minute before
powering ON to recover from the problem.
2. If a library firmware update was just performed, try
repeating the update procedure.
All firmware (library and See “Updating Library and Drive Firmware” on page 4-34.
drive) is not at the latest
level…
Front Panel LEDs One or more front panel See “Interpreting Front Panel LEDs” on page 6-8.
LEDs is ON or blinking…
Host Attachment You are experiencing host See “Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems” on page 6-7.
Interface attachment interface
problems…
Installation and You are experiencing See “Installation and Configuration Problems” on page 6-8.
Configuration trouble installing or
configuring your library…
ITDT The Performance Test Items affecting the duration of the test are:
duration varies… • The level of adapter device driver
• Your adapter model and type
Library Not Booting There is a blank operator Failure of the login screen to appear on the Operator Panel in 15
panel/display… minutes indicates that the boot-up process is not completing.
The Accessor doesn’t 1. Power OFF the library and wait at least one minute before
move… powering ON to recover from the problem.
The display is stuck on 2. If a library firmware update was just performed, try
initialization for extended repeating the update procedure.
period of time…

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-5

Problem Area If… Then…
Logs You are required to Using the Web User Interface.
download the library log or • Library log: Service Library → Download Library Logs
drive log… • Drive log: Service Library → Download Drive Logs
You need to acquire library See Appendix E, “Message Retrieval at the Host,” on page E-1.
or drive information at the
host…
Network Time The library time is not Using the Web User Interface.
Protocol (NTP) being updated by the NTP 1. Disable NTP.
server… 2. Set the time manually.
3. Enable NTP.
Power If the power supply switch See “Isolating Library Power Problems” on page 6-6.
is ON and the library is
OFF…
Web User Interface HTML error 404 appears on See “Isolating Web User Interface Problems” on page 6-7.
computer screen when
trying to launch the Web
User Interface…

Isolating Problems

Isolating Library Power Problems

1. Ensure the power cord is plugged in at the power supply and at the electrical
outlet, then turn library power ON. Feel for air flowing out of the cooling fan
grill on the rear of the library. Power is good if air is flowing from the cooling fan
grill.
2. If power appears to be missing:
a. Plug the power cord into another electrical outlet.
b. Plug another device into the outlet to test.
c. If the outlet tests OK, try another power cord.
3. If you have verified that the electrical outlet and power cord works properly, but
the power supply is still failing, replace the library (see “Replacing the Library”
on page 8-13).
4. If the power supply seems to be delivering power to the library; however, air
does not flow from the power supply cooling fan grill on the rear of the library,
replace the library (see “Replacing the Library” on page 8-13).

Isolating Drive Problems

1. Ensure that the drive firmware is at the latest level (visit http://www.ibm.com/
storage/).
2. Cycle library power.
3. If the drive is experiencing permanent or temporary errors or if the Clean LED is
lit on the front panel of the library, clean the drive.
4. Run Library Verify.
a. If the test fails, replace the library.
b. If the test passes, run SAS Wrap Test.
i. If the test passes, resume normal library operations.
ii. If the test fails, replace the library.

6-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 5. Using the host interface test tool, ITDT, run the Scan function (s) to verify that the
host application interface can detect the drive and the library. To further test the
interface communication path, run the Test Device function (t), if available, after
selecting the drive. This function will write/read data across the interface as well
as sending a command to the drive to run the internal performance Read/Write
test.
6. If the host tool, ITDT, cannot detect the drive or library, look for problems with
the host interface cabling, the HBA, the device driver or the backup application
software.

Isolating Web User Interface Problems

1. Verify that you entered the account name and password correctly. The account
name and password are case sensitive.
2. Verify that other library users are not entering commands from the Web User
Interface or Operator Panel at the same time you are issuing commands.
3. Ensure that library firmware is at the latest level (visit http://www.ibm.com/
storage/).
4. Ensure that the Ethernet cable is securely plugged in the rear of the library at the
Ethernet port.
5. Ensure that the correct IP, netmask, and gateway addresses are keyed into the
network parameters.
6. Ensure that the correct IP address is being used on the web browser.
7. If the Ethernet connection is a direct connection between the PC and the library, a
special “crossover” Ethernet cable is required.

Note: On newer PCs, either straight through or crossover Ethernet cables may
be used since the crossover requirement is provided internally.

8. Check the Ethernet cable carefully (or try another cable) and, if the cable is
connected to a network hub or switch, try a different port.
9. If the Web User Interface is still malfunctioning, refer to “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.

Isolating Host Attachment Interface Problems

After successfully exercising “Isolating Drive Problems” on page 6-6, and more
specifically “Running Library Verify Diagnostics” on page 4-12 from the Operator
Panel (Service → Library Verify), the following procedures are suggested to help
isolate the failure to properly establish connectivity to the Host Bus Adapter (HBA).

1. If not already performed, run SAS Wrap Test from the Operator Panel. The test
will require that a proper Wrap Tool be installed at some point during the test
procedure.
a. If the wrap test fails, replace the library, and skip to Step 4.
b. b. Proceed to Step 2 if the wrap test passes.
2. Use the utility, ITDT, to evaluate connectivity from the HBA through the cabling
to the drive. ITDT does not require separate device drivers, thus the Operating
System has the ability to scan and find all the LTO devices that are attached.
a. If ITDT cannot successfully locate the LTO drive, suspect cabling or HBA
problems, and skip to Step 4.
b. If ITDT successfully located the LTO drive, proceed to Step 3. See “Using the
IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)” on page 7-1 for a brief description
of ITDT and instructions on how to download the tool from the web.

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-7

 3. If ITDT successfully locates the LTO device(s), verify that the correct application
device drivers and backup application software is properly installed.
4. Ensure that all the required or latest available Operating System files and/or
updates (dll’s, PTF’s, etc.) have been installed and applied.

Installation and Configuration Problems

Problems encountered during the installation of the library are usually caused by
improper application software configuration errors or an incorrectly configured
operating system. If the application software that you are using is not communicating
with the library after installation, check the following:
• Accessor locking screw: Ensure that the Accessor locking screw on the rear panel
of the library has been removed before powering on the library. See “Removing the
Accessor Locking Screw” on page 3-12.
• HBA LUN 0/1 support: A single ID will address both drive and library since the
drive is LUN 0 and the library is LUN 1. These models require an HBA that
supports LUN scanning which must be enabled at the HBA. See “Logical Unit
Number (LUN) Scanning” on page 1-8 and “Supported Servers, Operating
Systems, and Software” on page 1-11.
• Cable connections: Ensure that there are no bent pins on cables and that all
connections are securely fastened.
• SAS cables and interposers: Ensure that SAS cables and interposers (if any) are
properly attached. See “Connecting the Host Interface Cables” on page 3-13.
• Backup application installation: Refer to the documentation included with your
backup application software for instructions on how to verify proper installation.
• Device driver installation: Ensure that the proper device driver, if applicable, is
installed for the library.

Note: Many backup applications use their own drivers for the library and drive.
Before installing a driver, make sure it will not be in conflict with the software.
Contact your backup application vendor for this information.

Review the information in Chapter 3, “Installation and Configuration,” on page 3-1 to

determine if a step was missed or misread.

If you are still experiencing difficulty installing or configuring your library, see
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-1.

Important: Do not disassemble the library. The warranty on your library is voided if
the unit is disassembled without the approval of IBM Technical Support.

Interpreting Front Panel LEDs

Light emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front panel of the library provide a visual
indication about the status of certain library components. The LEDs can sometimes
communicate that a problem exists when operator interventions cannot.

1 2 3 4
a29z0006

Figure 6-1. Front panel LEDs

6-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 1 Ready/Activity LED 3 Attention LED
2 Cleaning LED 4 Error LED

Table 6-1. Front Panel LED indicators

Ready/
Library Condition Cleaning LED Attention LED Error LED Message on Display
Activity LED
POST (Power ON Self Blinks 2 times
OFF OFF OFF INITIALIZING...INVENTORY...
Test) per second
Blinks 2 times
Magazine open OFF OFF OFF PLEASE INSERT MAGAZINE
per second
Blinks 2 times
Magazine unlocked OFF OFF OFF MAGAZINE UNLOCKED
per second
Blinks 2 times
I/O Station open OFF OFF OFF PLEASE CLOSE I/O STATION
per second
Blinks 2 times
I/O Station unlocked OFF OFF OFF I/O STATION UNLOCKED
per second
Library firmware is Blinks 2 times LOADER FIRMWARE
OFF OFF OFF
being updated per second UPDATING!
Drive firmware is Blinks 2 times DRIVE FIRMWARE
OFF OFF OFF
being updated per second UPDATING!
Drive dump is being
Blinks 2 times DRIVE DUMP DATA
uploaded to host OFF OFF OFF
per second UPLOADING!
computer
Blinks 2 times
Library is offline OFF OFF OFF OFFLINE
per second
Cartridge is being Blinks 1 time
OFF OFF OFF READY
moved per second
Library error *** CHK ***
ON OFF OFF ON
occurred CODE: [XXXX]
DRIVE FAULT
Drive error occurred ON OFF OFF ON
CODE: [X]
Cartridge error MEDIA FAULT
ON OFF ON OFF
occurred CODE: [X]
Cleaning cartridge
ON OFF ON OFF REPLACE CLEANING MEDIA
has expired
Drive has requested
ON ON OFF OFF CLEAN DRIVE
to be cleaned
Blinks 1 time
Drive is being cleaned ON OFF OFF CLEANING...
per second
Library is online and
ready to receive a ON OFF OFF OFF READY
command

Chapter 6. Troubleshooting 6-9

Reseating Cables
To reseat external library cables, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the following cables on the rear panel of the library.
a. SAS attachment for the drive
b. Ethernet cable for connection to a network
c. Power supply cable
2. Check and reseat, if necessary, all of the cables connected to your library.
3. Verify that there is no damage to any connector pins.

E-mailing Logs
Logs provide a summary of the current status, warnings, and errors in the library, and
include configuration settings and information provided in Operator Interventions.

Download current logs of the library and drive when requested by your service
representative. To e-mail current logs:
1. Ensure that no applications are accessing the library. If a library operation is in
progress, wait until it finishes before attempting to generate the logs.
2. Download the current library log from the Web User Interface by selecting
Service Library → Download Library Logs, click Refresh, and click Download.
3. Download the current drive log from the Web User Interface by selecting Service
Library → Download Drive Logs, click Refresh, and click Download.
4. When requested by IBM, attach the log to an e-mail message and send it to IBM
Technical Support for further diagnosis.

6-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Chapter 7. Service Procedures

“Using the IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)” on page 7-1

“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on page 7-1

Using the IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)

ITDT is a tool with multifunction capability and is a quick, convenient, and efficient
method for drive firmware updates. It can also assist with drive dump retrievals.

Below are some of the capabilities of this tool:

• Firmware update capability via host interface to all IBM LTO Tape Drive products.
• Does not require any special device drivers.
• Available for most major platforms (Windows®, AIX®, SUN, Linux™, NetWare).
• Capable of uploading drive dump files.
• The primary function is to thoroughly test a drive. However, if the library is online
to the server/host where the tool resides, ITDT will communicate with the drive
through the library to load and unload a test cartridge, thereby exercising some
library functions.
• Scans the host interface to find and display all IBM LTO devices. The tool will not
display nor allow selection of any non-IBM devices.
• The “Help” selection explains the required syntax as well as a brief explanation of
each particular function.
• A Readme text file will be posted with the .exe file for a thorough explanation of
initial tool download information from the web as well as explanation of tool
capabilities.
• The tool is available as a command-line utility, invoked by keying in the executable
name, itdt, from the directory where the tool is located, and as a graphical user
interface (GUI) tool.

To download the ITDT tool and instructions for using the tool, visit
http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/.

Contacting IBM Technical Support

Before placing a call to IBM Technical Support, perform the following steps.

Note: Where instructions refer you to the web, visit http://www-03.ibm.com/

servers/storage/support/lto/.

1. Verify that you have exhausted all of the following troubleshooting options:
a. Perform all recommended diagnostic procedures. See Chapter 6,
“Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.
b. Verify that the library’s and drive’s firmware is at the most recent level. To
determine the latest release of firmware, visit the web.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 7-1

 c. Verify that your device drivers are at the most recent level (see your server
(host) manual for instructions).
• For the latest release of IBM device drivers, visit the web.
• For the latest release of device drivers by Independent Software Vendors
(ISVs), visit the appropriate third-party web site.
d. Verify whether your hardware and software configuration is supported. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the web.
e. Ensure that cables and connectors are not damaged.
f. Review all documentation carefully. (Experience has demonstrated that most
questions are answered in your documentation.)
2. Follow these steps to take full advantage of your call:
a. Be prepared to explain whether the software or hardware has worked
properly at anytime in the past. Have you changed anything recently?
b. Pinpoint the exact location of your problem, if possible. Note the steps that
led to the problem. Can you duplicate the problem or is it a one-time
occurrence?
c. Note any error messages displayed on your PC monitor or file server. Write
down the exact error message.
d. If at all possible, call while at your computer, with the library installed and
turned on.
e. If running on a network, have all relevant information available (that is, type,
version number, network hardware, and so on).
f. Having this information available when you call for customer assistance will
enable support personnel to resolve your problem in the most efficient
manner possible.
• Library Machine type and Model name(s)
• Serial number of the library (front of the library on the label underneath the
power button)
• Library and drive firmware levels currently installed
• Device driver information
• Host application name and version
• Type of host, operating system version, clock speed, RAM, network type,
network version, and any special boards installed
3. The IBM Support Center will assist with problem determination and initiate
shipment of a replacement part, if needed, to the customer’s location. To contact
IBM Technical Support:
• In the USA: 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378)
• All other Countries/Regions: http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/
• To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click Open a
Service Request.

7-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures

“Required Tools” on page 8-1

“Replacing a Defective Cartridge Magazine” on page 8-1
“Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually” on page 8-1
“Moving the Library from a Rack to a Desktop” on page 8-2
“Moving the Library from a Desktop to a Rack” on page 8-7
“Replacing the Library” on page 8-13
“Applying a RID Tag to a Library” on page 8-16

Required Tools
Installing or relocating the rack mount kit or deskside kit for your library requires the
following tool:
• #2 Phillips screwdriver

Replacing a Defective Cartridge Magazine

After receiving your replacement cartridge magazine, complete the following steps to
replace the defective cartridge magazine. The library does not need to be powered
OFF for this procedure.
1. Remove the defective cartridge magazine from the library using the Operator
Panel or the manual method of removal.
• Operator Panel: Use the Unlock Magazine command. See “Unlocking the
Cartridge Magazine” on page 4-4.
• Manual method: See “Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually” on
page 8-1.
If you are unable to remove the defective cartridge magazine from the library
using either of the above methods, see “Contacting IBM Technical Support” on
page 7-1.
2. After removing the defective magazine from the library, remove all cartridges
from the defective magazine and insert them into the replacement magazine.
3. Insert the new magazine with cartridges into the library. Wait for the library to
complete its inventory before resuming normal library operations.
4. Properly dispose of the defective magazine.

Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually

This procedure is used to remove the cartridge magazine manually when, for
example, the power is turned OFF or if the magazine fails to unlock in response to the
Unlock Magazine command from the Operator Panel.

To unlock the cartridge magazine manually:

1. On the front panel, locate the access hole for the cartridge magazine locking
release mechanism to the left of the Operator Panel ( 1 in Figure 8-1).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 8-1

 a29z0027
1

Figure 8-1. Cartridge magazine lock release access hole

2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip, or similar object, into the lock release
access hole and gently push the lock mechanism to release the lock and eject the
cartridge magazine.
3. If the I/O Station is enabled, push the lock mechanism twice or push and hold
the lock mechanism until the cartridge has been withdrawn far enough to clear
the I/O Station lock.
4. Remove the cartridge magazine from the front of the library. If the magazine is
stuck in the library and does not eject, see “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
on page 7-1.
5. Examine the magazine and cartridges for damage.
• If there is damage to a cartridge, replace that cartridge.
• If there is damage to the magazine, replace the magazine.

Moving the Library from a Rack to a Desktop

This procedure is used to relocate a library mounted in a rack using the rack mount
kit to a desktop using the deskside kit.

Removing Library from a Rack

1. Take the library offline.

Note: If the library is processing queued requests, wait for the library to finish
the current library task.

2. From the Web User Interface, select Configure Library → Save/Restore → Save
to save the current library configuration to a file for easy restoration.
3. After saving your configuration, log out of the Web User Interface and close the
Internet browser.
4. From the Operator Panel, select Unlock Magazine, and press Enter to remove the
cartridge magazine (if necessary).

Note: If the cartridge magazine fails to unlock in response to the Unlock

Magazine command from the Operator Panel, you can unlock the
magazine manually. See “Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually”
on page 8-1.

5. From the Operator Panel, select Move to Ship Position, and press Enter. This
moves the Accessor assembly to a safe position ready for moving the library.

Note: If the library is to be transported any distance, this move is necessary to

park the Accessor in the position where it can be secured by the Accessor
locking screw.

8-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 6. From the Operator Panel top menu, select Logoff, and press Enter.
7. On the rear panel of the library:
a. Power OFF the library by toggling the power supply switch to the OFF (O)
position.
b. Disconnect the power cable from the library power supply.
c. Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
d. Disconnect the SAS host interface cable.
8. Insert and tighten the Accessor locking screw 1 .

a29z0026
1

Figure 8-2. Insert Accessor locking screw

9. Remove the SAS cable, power cable, and Ethernet cable from the hook and loop
fastener strap 12 on the rear of the library (Figure 8-3).

12

a29z0023

Figure 8-3. Remove cables at the rear of the library

10. Remove the two round-head screws 10 on each rear bracket securing the rear of
the library to the rack (Figure 8-4).

10 10
a29z0022

Figure 8-4. Removing screws at the rear of the library

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-3

 11. Remove the large black screws 11 from each front bracket securing the front of
the library to the rack, and slide the library chassis out of the rack (Figure 8-5).

11

a29z0021
Figure 8-5. Removing screws at the front of the library
12. Remove the flat-head screws 8 to remove the left 3 and right 4 front brackets
from the front of the library chassis (Figure 8-6).

8
3

4
a29z0017

Figure 8-6. Removing the front brackets from the library chassis

Installing the Library on a Desktop

For details on the deskside kit components, see “Installing the Deskside Cover” on
page 3-2.

1. Attach the left 5 and right 3 rails to the chassis using 3 flat-head screws 6 on
each side (Figure 8-7).

8-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 5

a29z0009
6

Figure 8-7. Attaching side rails to the library chassis

2. Turn the library over and attach the feet 1 to the designated locations on the
bottom of the library (Figure 8-8). Return the library to the upright position.

a29z0013
Figure 8-8. Attaching the feet
3. Position the deskside cover 2 in the correct orientation over the library chassis
and attach the cover to the library using 3 flat-head screws 6 on each side
(Figure 8-9).

2
a29z0011

Figure 8-9. Attaching the cover to the library chassis (side screws)

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-5

 4. Attach the deskside cover using the 2 large pan-head screws 4 on the rear of the
library (Figure 8-10).

a29z0012
Figure 8-10. Attaching the cover to the library chassis (rear screws)
5. Place the library in the desired desktop location.

Important: Do not place the library on its side. Do not stack objects on top of the
library.

6. Remove the Accessor locking screw 1 .

a29z0026

Figure 8-11. Removing Accessor locking screw

7. On the rear panel of the library:
a. Connect the SAS host interface cable.
b. Connect the Ethernet cable.
c. Connect the power cable from the library power supply. Route all cables
through the hook and loop fastener strap.
d. Power ON the library by toggling the power supply switch to the ON (|)
position.
8. Insert the cartridge magazine if previously removed.
9. Restore the library configuration. See “Saving and Restoring Configuration
Settings” on page 4-28.
10. From the Operator Panel, select Run Library Verify, and press Enter to run
library diagnostics. Follow the on-screen instructions. If an error occurs, see
Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.
11. Take the library online.

Important: Do not stack objects on top of the library.

For more detailed instructions, see Chapter 3, “Installation and Configuration,” on

page 3-1.

8-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Moving the Library from a Desktop to a Rack
This procedure is used to relocate a library mounted on the desktop using the
deskside kit to a rack using the rack mount kit.

Removing Library from a Desktop

1. Take the library offline.

Note: If the library is processing queued requests, wait for the library to finish
the current library task.

2. From the Web User Interface, select Configure Library → Save/Restore → Save
to save the current library configuration to a file for easy restoration.
3. After saving your configuration, log out of the Web User Interface and close the
Internet browser.
4. From the Operator Panel, select Unlock Magazine, and press Enter to remove the
cartridge magazine (if necessary).

Note: If the cartridge magazine fails to unlock in response to the Unlock

Magazine command from the Operator Panel, you can unlock the
magazine manually. See “Unlocking the Cartridge Magazine Manually”
on page 8-1.

5. From the Operator Panel, select Move to Ship Position, and press Enter. This
moves the Accessor assembly to a safe position ready for moving the library.

Note: If the library is to be transported any distance, this move is necessary to

park the Accessor in the position where it can be secured by the Accessor
locking screw.

6. From the Operator Panel top menu, select Logoff, and press Enter.
7. On the rear panel of the library:
a. Power OFF the library by toggling the power supply switch to the OFF (O)
position.
b. Disconnect the power cable from the library power supply.
c. Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
d. Disconnect the SAS host interface cable.
8. Insert and tighten the Accessor locking screw 1 .
a29z0026

Figure 8-12. Insert Accessor locking screw

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-7

 9. Remove the large pan-head screws 4 on the rear of the library (Figure 8-13).

a29z0012
Figure 8-13. Removing screws from the rear of the library
10. Remove the flat-head screws 6 on each side securing the deskside cover to the
library, and remove the deskside cover 2 (Figure 8-14).

a29z0011
6

Figure 8-14. Removing the cover from the library chassis

11. Turn the library over and remove the feet 1 from the bottom of the library
(Figure 8-15). Return the library to the upright position.

1
a29z0013

Figure 8-15. Removing the feet

8-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 12. Remove the flat-head screws 6 on each side to remove the left 5 and right 3
rails from the chassis (Figure 8-16).

a29z0009
6

Figure 8-16. Removing side rails from the library chassis

Installing the Library in a Rack

For details on the rack mount kit components, see “Installing in a Rack” on page 3-5.

1. Determine the location in your rack for your library and mark with a pencil. For
details on rack mount locations, see “Installing in a Rack” on page 3-5.
2. Attach the left 3 and right 4 front brackets to the front of the library chassis
using two flat-head screws 8 on each side (Figure 8-17). Use the bottom two
screw holes on each side.

8
3

4
a29z0017

Figure 8-17. Attaching the front brackets to the library chassis

3. Attach the left 1 and right 2 rear brackets to the left 5 and right 6 front rails
using two round-head screws 10 on each side (Figure 8-18).

Note: Run the hook and loop fastener strap through the slot on the right rear
bracket and attach it back upon itself.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-9

 1 12
2

10

a29z0019
6

Figure 8-18. Attaching the rear brackets to the rails

Important: Do NOT tighten these screws completely at this time.

4. Slide in the rear rails 7 from back to front, to create the rail assemblies. Ensure
the screw holes face outwards (Figure 8-19).

a29z0018

Figure 8-19. Creating the rail assemblies

5. Install the rail assemblies into the rack (Figure 8-20). Ensure the three holes in the
front of the unit align with the 1U space marked on the vertical rails in Step 1.
Secure the rails to the rack using four flat-head screws 9 on each side of the rack.
Use both of the two screw locations on the rear of the rack rail. Use the top and
middle screw locations on the front of the rack rail.

8-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 9

a29z0020
Figure 8-20. Installing the rail assemblies
6. Slide the library chassis into the rack. Secure the front of the library to the rack
using the large black screws 11 in the bottom holes on each front bracket
(Figure 8-21).

11
a29z0021

Figure 8-21. Securing the front of the library in the rack

7. Secure the rear of the library to the rack using two round-head screws 10 on each
rear bracket (Figure 8-22). Tighten the other rear bracket screws to secure the
library to the rack.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-11

 10 10

a29z0022
Figure 8-22. Securing the rear of the library in the rack
8. Run the SAS cable, power cable, and Ethernet cable through the hook and loop
fastener strap 12 , then tighten the strap (Figure 8-23).

12

a29z0023
Figure 8-23. The cables at the rear of the library
9. Remove the Accessor locking screw 1 .
a29z0026

Figure 8-24. Removing Accessor locking screw

10. On the rear panel of the library:
a. Connect the SAS host interface cable.
b. Connect the Ethernet cable.
c. Connect the power cable or rack PDU line cord to the library power supply.
d. Power ON the library by toggling the power supply switch to the ON (|)
position.
11. Insert the cartridge magazine if previously removed.
12. Restore the library configuration. See “Saving and Restoring Configuration
Settings” on page 4-28.

8-12 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 13. From the Operator Panel, select Run Library Verify, and press Enter to run
library diagnostics. Follow the on-screen instructions. If an error occurs, see
Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.
14. Take the library online.

For more detailed instructions, see Chapter 3, “Installation and Configuration,” on

page 3-1.

Replacing the Library

The entire library, including the drive, is a CRU. At CRU replacement, the serial
number of the new library must be changed to the serial number of the old library to
maintain IBM entitlement to service. If the static IP address of the new library
matches the static IP address saved in the cookie, the Web User Interface checks the
serial number of the new library against the serial number saved in the cookie. If the
new serial number is different from the saved serial number, the saved data in the
cookie can be used to change the serial number of the new library and configure the
new library. If the data inheritance fails or your network configuration uses DHCP,
the library serial number can be changed using the Web User Interface when logged
in as service.

Does Auto Saved

VPD Data exist for Library
IP Address?
Yes No

VPD Data
is Saved
Does Library S/N =
Auto Saved S/N?
Yes No

VPD Data
is Saved
Write Auto
Saved VPD Data to
Library?
Yes No

Auto Saved VPD

Data is written
to Library Overwrite Auto
Saved VPD Data?
Yes No

Auto Saved Auto Saved

a29z0059

VPD Data is VPD Data is

overwritten not overwritten

Figure 8-25. Library configuration using cookies

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-13

 This procedure is used to replace the entire library in the event of a serious library
malfunction.

1. If using a static IP address, make a note of your library’s IP address. If using

DHCP, proceed to the next step.
2. Remove the old library chassis using the corresponding procedure in “Removing
Library from a Rack” on page 8-2 or “Removing Library from a Desktop” on
page 8-7.
3. Install the new library chassis using the corresponding procedure in “Installing
the Library on a Desktop” on page 8-4 or “Installing the Library in a Rack” on
page 8-9.
4. It is necessary to change the serial number on the new library to the serial
number of the old library to preserve your entitlement to IBM service.
• If you are using a static IP address, complete the following steps.
a. Using the Operator Panel, enter the network settings for the library. See
“Configuring Network Settings” on page 4-10. Be sure to disable DHCP.
b. Log in to the Web User Interface as admin. The following screen appears.

a29z0060

Figure 8-26. Auto saved data confirmation

c. Answer Yes to restore the saved configuration from your old library to
your new library. Answer No to maintain the current configuration of the
new library and to display the next Confirm Dialog box.
a29z0061

Figure 8-27. Overwrite confirmation dialog box

d. Answer No to maintain both configuration files. Answer Yes to maintain
the new library configuration.
e. Verify all configuration settings. Change any settings as required. Update
the Library Configuration Form, if necessary. Save your new configuration
using the Web User Interface (Configure Library → Save/Restore).
f. Update your host application device table with the new drive serial
number. To determine the new drive serial number, log in to the Web User
Interface and refer to the drive information on the Library Map.
• If you are using DHCP to acquire an IP address, complete the following steps.
a. Using the Operator Panel, retrieve your new library IP address. See
“Viewing Current Information” on page 4-3.

8-14 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 b. Contact IBM Technical Support for the service password.
In the USA: 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378)
All other countries and regions: http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/.
c. Log in to the Web User Interface. Use the username service and the
password from IBM Technical Support.
d. Go to Configure Library → Save/Restore. Enter the serial number to match
the serial number of your old library and click Restore Serial.

a29z0094
Figure 8-28. Save/Restore screen
e. On the same screen, click Restore to restore the saved configuration from
your old library to your new library. If you do not have a saved
configuration on your host, you must reconfigure your library. See
“Configuring the Library” on page 3-14.
f. Log out of the Web User Interface.
g. Log in to the Web User Interface as admin.
h. Verify all configuration settings. Change any settings as required. Update
the Library Configuration Form, if necessary. Save your new configuration
using the Web User Interface (Configure Library → Save/Restore).
i. Update your host application device table with the new drive serial
number. To determine the new drive serial number, log in to the Web User
Interface and refer to the drive information on the Library Map.
5. After physically installing and reconfiguring the new library, confirm that the
library firmware installed is the latest version. Note the firmware revision
number using the System Summary window of the Web User Interface and
check against the latest firmware version at http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/
storage/support. To update the library firmware, if necessary, see “Updating
Library and Drive Firmware” on page 4-34.
6. Copy the serial number and WWN from the old library onto the new library. This
step is necessary to maintain a valid warranty. See “Applying a RID Tag to a
Library” on page 8-16.

Chapter 8. Removal and Replacement Procedures 8-15

Applying a RID Tag to a Library
A RID (Repair Identification) Tag maintains the original serial number record and
WWN of the machine to ensure that your warranty coverage, if applicable, is not
interrupted. The tag is important for customer inventory accuracy. Follow the
instructions on the RID tag precisely.

a29z0052

Figure 8-29. RID tag

1. Copy the machine type (MT) and serial number (SN) from the old library onto
the Repair ID tag ( 1 in Figure 8-29).
2. Copy the Worldwide Name (WWN) from the old library onto the WWN ID label
( 2 in Figure 8-29).
3. Place the RID tag close to, but not covering, the serial number on the new library.
Repeat for the WWN ID label.

8-16 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Chapter 9. Parts List

“Features” on page 9-1

“Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs)” on page 9-1
“Power Cords and Receptacles” on page 9-2

Features

Table 9-1. Optional features

Feature HVEC Part
Description
Code Number
2m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable 5402 95P4711
(from HBA with SFF-8470 to drive with SFF-8088)
5.5m SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable 5406 95P4712
(from HBA with SFF-8470 to drive with SFF-8088)
2m Mini-SAS 1x Cable 5502 95P4713
(from HBA/Interposer with SFF-8088 to drive with SFF-8088)
5.5m Mini-SAS 1x Cable 5506 95P4714
(from HBA/Interposer with SFF-8088 to drive with SFF-8088)
Transparent LTO Encryption 5901 45E3797
Rack Mount Kit with RML Line Cord 7006 45E3785
Deskside Kit 7010 45E3789
Additional Cartridge Magazine 8111 45E3793

Customer Replaceable Units (CRUs)

The TS2900 Tape Autoloader has customer replaceable units (CRUs) that must be
added, removed, and replaced by the customer. If you choose to have the CRU added,
removed, or replaced by an IBM Service Representative, there will be a charge for the
service.

Table 9-2. Customer replaceable units

Description CRU Part Number
S3H Generation 3 Tape Drive Library Chassis 45E4824
S4H Generation 4 Tape Drive Library Chassis 45E4831
Cartridge Magazine 46Y0016

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 9-1

Power Cords and Receptacles
Figure 9-1 shows the receptacles that are used by the power cords in Table 9-3. Match
the index number that is beside each plug to the index number in the table.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

a77ug005

17 18 19 20

Figure 9-1. Types of power cord receptacles

9-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table 9-3. Power cords
Description, Feature Code
Plug Standard Reference Country or Region Index Number in Figure 9-1
(FC), and Part Number (PN)
US/Canada NEMA 5-15P Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, 1
• 2.8 m, 125V Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil,
• FC 9800 Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica,
• AAS PN 39M5081
Curacao, Dominican
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7141 Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guatemala,
Guyana, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Liberia,
Mexico, Netherlands
Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines,
Saudi Arabia, South Korea,
Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad
Tobago, Venezuela, US
Chicago NEMA 5-15P Chicago, U.S.A. 1
• 1.8 m, 125 V
• FC 9986
• AAS PN 39M5080
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7143
US/Canada NEMA 6-15P Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, 2
• 2.8 m, 250 V Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil,
• FC 9833 Canada, Cayman Islands,
Costa Rica, Curacao,
• AAS PN 39M5095
Dominican Republic,
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7145 Ecuador, El Salvador,
Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti,
Honduras, Jamaica, Japan,
Liberia, Netherlands
Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines,
Suriname, Taiwan,
Thailand, Trinidad Tobago,
Venezuela, US
Australia AS 3112 Argentina, Australia, China, 3
• 2.8 m, 250V NZS 198 Colombia, New Zealand,
• FC 9831 Papua New Guinea,
Paraguay, Uruguay, Western
• AAS PN 39M5102
Samoa
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7153

Chapter 9. Parts List 9-3

Table 9-3. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code
Plug Standard Reference Country or Region Index Number in Figure 9-1
(FC), and Part Number (PN)
France, Germany CEE 7 - VII Afghanistan, Algeria, 4
• 2.8 m, 250V Andorra, Angola, Aruba,
• FC 9820 Austria, Belgium, Benin,
Brazil, Bulgaria, Burkina
• AAS PN 39M5123
Faso, Burundi, Cameroon,
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7146 Central African Republic,
Chad, Congo-Brazzaville,
Curacao, Czech Republic,
Democratic Republic of
Congo, Denmark, Egypt,
Finland, France, French
Guiana, Germany, Greece,
Guinea, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast,
Jordan, Kenya, Korea,
Lebanon, Luxembourg,
Macau, Malagasy, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania,
Mauritius, Monaco,
Morocco, Mozambique,
Netherlands, Netherlands
Antilles, New Caledonia,
Niger, Norway, Poland,
Portugal, Romania, Russia,
Saudi Arabia, Senegal,
Spain, Sweden, Sudan,
Syria, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey,
Yugoslavia, Zaire,
Zimbabwe, Vietnam
Denmark DK2-5A Denmark 5
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9821
• AAS PN 39M5130
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7147
South Africa SABS 164 Bangladesh, Burma, 6
• 2.8 m, 250V Pakistan, South Africa, Sri
• FC 9829 Lanka
• AAS PN 39M5144
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7151
United Kingdom BS 1363 Antigua, Bahrain, Bermuda, 7
• 2.8 m, 250V Brunei, Channel Islands,
• FC 9825 China (Hong Kong S.A.R.),
Cyprus, Fiji, Ghana,
• AAS PN 39M5151
Guyana, India, Iraq, Ireland,
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7148 Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait,
Malaysia, Malawi, Malta,
Nepal, Nigeria, Oman,
Polynesia, Qatar, Sierra
Leone, Singapore, Tanzania,
Uganda, UK, United Arab
Emirate (Dubai), Yemen,
Zambia

9-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table 9-3. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code
Plug Standard Reference Country or Region Index Number in Figure 9-1
(FC), and Part Number (PN)
Switzerland SEV SN 416534 Liechtenstein, Switzerland 8
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9828
• AAS PN 39M5158
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7150
Italy CEI 23- 16 Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, 9
• 2.8 m, 250V Somalia
• FC 9830
• AAS PN 39M5165
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7152
Israel S11-32-1971 Israel 10
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9827
• AAS PN 39M5172
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7149
Argentina IEC 83-A5 Argentina, Brazil, Colombia, 11
• 2.8 m, 250V Paraguay, Trinidad Tobago,
• FC 9834 Uruguay
• AAS PN 39M5068
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7154
China CCEE People’s Republic of China 12
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9840
• AAS PN 39M5206
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7155
Taiwan LV* CNS 10917-3 Taiwan 13
• 2.8 m, 125V
• FC 9835
• AAS PN 39M5247
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R7158
Taiwan HV** CNS 10917-3 Taiwan 14
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9841
• AAS PN 39M5254
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R6981
Japan LV* JIS C8303, C8306 Japan 15
• 2.8 m, 125V
• FC 9842
• AAS PN 39M5199
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R6982
Japan HV** JIS C8303, C8306 Japan 16
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9843
• AAS PN 39M5186
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R6983

Chapter 9. Parts List 9-5

Table 9-3. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code
Plug Standard Reference Country or Region Index Number in Figure 9-1
(FC), and Part Number (PN)
Korea HV** KS C8305, K60884-1 Korea 17
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9844
• AAS PN 39M5219
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R6984
India HV** IS 6538 India 18
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9845
• AAS PN 39M5226
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R6985
Brazil LV* InMetro NBR 6147 Brazil 19
• 2.8 m, 125V
• FC 9846
• AAS PN 39M5233
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R6986
Brazil HV** InMetro NBR 14136 Brazil 20
• 2.8 m, 250V
• FC 9847
• AAS PN 39M5240
• HVEC/SAP PN 23R6987
* Low Voltage
** High Voltage

9-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel

“Web User Interface Service Login” on page A-1

“Connecting to the Library using the Telnet Service Port” on page A-5
“Drive/Cartridge “Removing/reinstalling the Library Chassis Cover” on page A-5
Removal” on “Removing/reinstalling the Tape Drive from/in the Library” on
page A-5 page A-10
“Manually Removing a Tape Cartridge from the Drive” on page A-11
“Removing a Stuck Cartridge Magazine” on page A-21

Web User Interface Service Login

The Web User Interface Java Applet requires Java 1.5.0 or higher for full functionality,
and is best viewed using Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher. Internet Explorer 7.0 or
higher is required for IPv6. If your computer does not have Java installed or you need
to upgrade your installation, download the latest version of the Java Runtime
Environment (JRE) for your platform from http://www.java.com/ and follow the
instructions provided to enable and configure the Java Runtime Environment for
your browser.

The Web User Interface can also be used to update the library and drive firmware,
and to download error logs, drive dumps, and other library data from the library.

Before the TS2900 Tape Autoloader can be managed over a network using the Web
User Interface, you must set up the initial network configuration of the library using
the Operator Panel. For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings” on
page 3-29.

Logging in to the Web User Interface

To log in to the Web User Interface from Internet Explorer, you need to enter the IP
address of the library. The IP address can be obtained using the View Current
Information command from the Operator Panel. For example, http://192.168.1.1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 A-1

 When the applet launches, the following warning message appears. This message is
normal and does not indicate a problem.

a29z0160
Figure A-1. Java security warning message
You can click the Always trust content from this publisher checkbox to avoid the
warning message in subsequent browser sessions.

Click Run to launch the Web User Interface.

a29z0095

Figure A-2. Login window

The factory default account login and password for a Service account is
• Account: service
• Password: Contact your next level of support.

A-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 The account name and password are case sensitive. After entering your account name
and password, use your mouse to click Login or press the Enter key.

For information on account privileges, see “User Privilege Comparison” on page A-3.

Common Header Elements

All Web User Interface windows (except for the Login screen) contain the following
common elements in the header:
• Help — Click to read context-sensitive help for the associated page.
• Logoff — Click to log out of the Web User Interface.

Menus Available from the Web User Interface

Figure A-3 shows the window for a Service account.

Figure A-3. Service account window a29z0098

For a complete description of all Web User Interface menu options, see Chapter 4,
“Operations,” on page 4-1.

User Privilege Comparison

User privilege levels are manually assigned to user accounts created within the
library. Controlling access to screens and operations within the library preserves the
integrity of the library and the data that is stored within the library.

There are four types of user privileges in the library.

• Users are allowed to monitor the library, but not perform actions that affect the
physical library.
• Superusers are allowed to operate the physical and logical library, but not perform
actions that affect the library configuration.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-3

 • Administrator users are allowed access to the entire physical library and logical
library, including configuration. One and only one administrator user must be
assigned the login name admin.
• Service users are allowed access to the entire physical library and logical library. In
addition, the Service user account can access diagnostic tools to help identify and
resolve library and drive problems. The Service user account is only displayed in
the User Access panel if logged in with a Service user login.

User privileges include:

• Multiple users can be logged in at one time on the Web User Interface.
• Any user can be logged in to only one interface at a time.

Table A-1. Menu commands and access privileges

Menu Command User Superuser Administrator User Service User
MONITOR LIBRARY
System Summary X X X X
Library Map X X X X
MANAGE LIBRARY
Move Cartridges – X X X
Unload Drive – X X X
Clean Drive – X X X
Library State – X X X
Inventory – X X X
CONFIGURE LIBRARY
User Access – – X X
Physical – – X X
Logical – – X X
Network – – X X
Encryption (3572-S4H only) – – X X
Date and Time – – X X
Notifications – – X X
Save/Restore – – X X
SERVICE LIBRARY
Key Path Diagnostics
– – X X
(3572-S4H only)
Operator Interventions X X X X
View Library Logs X X X X
Traces – – X X
Download Drive Logs – – X X
Download Library Logs X X X X
Reset Library/Drive – – X X
Firmware Update – – X X
Usage Statistics – – X X

A-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Connecting to the Library using the Telnet Service Port
The Telnet Service Port can be enabled to allow IBM service personnel to execute
extended troubleshooting procedures.

To enable the Telnet Service Port, have the library administrator complete the
following steps:
1. Log in to the Operator Panel.
2. Go to the Telnet Service Port item in the Service menu, and push Enter.
3. When Enable Telnet Port appears on the display, push Enter.
4. When Are you sure? appears on the display, push Enter.

To disable the Telnet Service Port, have the library administrator power cycle the
library.

Drive/Cartridge Removal
Important:
• It is strongly recommended that the drive and stuck tape be returned to IBM for
removal and recovery.
• These procedures must be performed only by a trained IBM service provider.
SSRs should claim their time against service code 33 ECA 013 when performing
this procedure.
• Inform the customer the following procedure has high risk of damaging the
drive and high risk of not being able to recover the data.

Removing/reinstalling the Library Chassis Cover

Important: FOR REFERENCE ONLY. The customer is not authorized to remove the
cover of the library. No customer serviceable components are inside the
library.

If you need to access the cartridge magazine or tape drive, complete the following
steps:
1. If possible, unload the tape drive and move the cartridge to its home position
(Operator Panel: Move Cartridge command; Web User Interface: Manage
Library → Move Cartridges).
2. Deconfigure the drive from the server (for instructions, see your server’s
documentation).
3. Turn OFF the power to the library.
4. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the library.
• For a desktop library, remove the deskside cover.
a. Remove the large pan-head screws 4 on the rear of the library
(Figure A-4).

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-5

 4

a29z0012
Figure A-4. Removing screws from the rear of the library
b. Remove the flat-head screws 6 on each side securing the deskside cover to
the library, and remove the deskside cover 2 (Figure A-5).

a29z0011
6

Figure A-5. Removing the deskside cover

c. Remove the flat-head screws 6 on each side to remove the left 5 and right
3 rails from the chassis (Figure A-6).

3
a29z0009

Figure A-6. Removing side rails from the library chassis

• For a rack mounted library, remove the library from the rack.
a. Remove the two round-head screws 10 on each rear bracket securing the
rear of the library to the rack (Figure A-7).

A-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 10 10

a29z0022
Figure A-7. Removing screws at the rear of the library
b. Remove the large black screws 11 from each front bracket securing the front
of the library to the rack, and slide the library chassis out of the rack
(Figure A-8).

11
a29z0021

Figure A-8. Removing screws at the front of the library

5. Remove the screws securing the library chassis cover (Figure A-9).

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-7

 a29z0054
Figure A-9. Library chassis cover screw locations
6. Lift the library chassis cover off vertically (Figure A-10).

a29z0055

Figure A-10. Library chassis cover removal

A-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Internal View of Library

3 4 5

a29z0005
1 2

Figure A-11. Internal components

Table A-2. Internal component descriptions

Number Component Description
1 Cartridge magazine The tape library has a single cartridge magazine that can hold up to 9
data cartridges, or 8 data cartridges with a 1-slot I/O Station.
Column 5/Tier 1 in the cartridge magazine can be configured as a 1-slot
I/O Station. Column 5/Tier 2 in the cartridge magazine is reserved for
the exchange position and can be accessed by the library only. The I/O
Station is used to import and export cartridges without interrupting
normal library operation. Beginning with Column 4, a minimum of one
column can be reserved for cleaning cartridges. Cleaning cartridges are
used to clean the tape drive heads. For configuration details, see
“Physical Library Settings” on page 3-19.
2 Accessor This component contains the library robot and bar code reader. The
accessor moves cartridges to/from the following:
• I/O Station
• storage slots
• tape drive
3 Library control board The library control board manages the entire library, including the
Operator Panel and Accessor, and is responsible for monitoring the
library to ensure that the library is functioning properly. It stores vital
product data (VPD) such as library settings, serial number, library logs,
and Accessor calibration backup data.
4 Power supply The power supply is the sole source of power for the library.

5 Tape Drive The library supports the Ultrium 3 Half-High Tape Drive and Ultrium 4
Half-High Tape Drive.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-9

 Removing/reinstalling the Tape Drive from/in the Library
To remove the SAS tape drive from the library, complete the following steps:
1. Turn OFF the power to the library.
2. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the library.
3. Remove the library cover(s). See “Removing/reinstalling the Library Chassis
Cover” on page A-5.
4. Disconnect the internal SAS cable ( 2 in Figure A-12).

a80hh024
1 2 3

Figure A-12. Rear panel of the SAS Half-high drive

5. If connected, disconnect the internal LDI (RS-422) cable from the LDI (RS-422)
connector ( 3 in Figure A-12).
6. Remove the cartridge magazine from the library.
7. Remove the drive mounting screws from the sides of the tape drive housing. Two
screws are located on each side of the drive (Figure A-13).

a29z0062

Figure A-13. Drive housing screw locations

8. Lift the tape drive out of the library chassis (Figure A-14).

A-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 a29z0063
Figure A-14. Tape drive removal
Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Manually Removing a Tape Cartridge from the Drive

The purpose of this section is to assist you in determining the condition of the
cartridge or the magnetic tape and to direct you to the procedure you must follow to
remove the cartridge.

Note:
• The best solution for recovering data on a damaged cartridge is to send it to IBM
for professional data recovery.
• Before using this procedure, you must have exhausted all other means of removing
the tape cartridge from the drive. Use this procedure only if you cannot remove the
tape cartridge by using any other means.
• Determine from the customer if the cartridge contains critical customer data. If the
cartridge contains sensitive data that cannot leave the site, inform the customer
that certain failure conditions diagnostics will be performed to test the drive for
continued use.
• The following removal procedures can destroy customer data! Use extreme care
when handling or removing the customer’s tape cartridges to minimize tape
damage and lost data.
• DO NOT TOUCH the magnetic tape or tape path. Both are extremely sensitive to
the oil and salt from your skin. Use clean, lint-free gloves when working around
magnetic tape or the tape path components.
• Electrostatic-sensitive components: Consider using an ESD Kit.
• After you remove the tape cartridge, advise the customer to copy the data to
another cartridge and to remove this tape cartridge from service.
• Do not use power tools or magnetic tools to perform this procedure.
• To avoid contamination and electrostatic-discharge damage to the drive, never
touch the head or electronic components inside the drive.
• If you cannot remove the cartridge from the drive using the following procedures,
contact your next level of support.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-11

 • The cartridge will not eject automatically at the end of a mid-tape recovery. Instead,
the tape will be reloaded into the drive and may result in the loss of data.
• INTERNAL COMPONENTS OF THE DRIVE ARE DELICATE AND CAN
EASILY BE DAMAGED. EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN MANUALLY
REMOVING A CARTRIDGE THAT WILL NOT EJECT AFTER PRESSING THE
UNLOAD BUTTON.

Before You Begin

1. If you have not already done so, attempt to remove the cartridge with the device
power ON and using library manager, a host application, or the unload button.
When using the Unload button, press and hold the button for 12 seconds. This
will cause the drive to eject the cartridge when it has completed the mid-tape
recovery.
2. If you have not already done so, ensure the operator has issued the appropriate
application commands to perform a rewind and unload of the cartridge. This is
to ensure that the stuck cartridge is not due to a hang condition in the
application.
3. If you have not already done so, attempt to remove the cartridge by power
cycling the drive. Look for the drive to attempt a midtape recovery.

Note: It can take up to one hour for the cartridge to rewind and unload.

4. If the cartridge unloads, inform the operator that the cartridge is unloaded. If the
cartridge does not unload, repeat steps 2 and 3 once before continuing with this
procedure.

Recommended Tools
• #1 Phillips screwdriver
• ESD Kit
• Flashlight (optional)
• #1 Flathead screwdriver (optional)

Beginning Procedure
1. Remove the drive. See “Removing/reinstalling the Tape Drive from/in the
Library” on page A-10.
2. Place the drive on a non-slip, sturdy work surface.
3. Ground yourself to the drive by using the ESD Kit.
4. Remove the cover of the drive by performing the following steps:
a. To remove the drive bezel, pull the right side of the bezel from the front of the
drive, then pull the left side of the bezel out of the frame of the drive.
b. To remove the cover of the internal drive, remove the four cover-mounting
screws ( 1 in Figure A-15). Two screws are located on each side of the drive.
Remove the cover by lifting it up.

A-12 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 1

a80hh022
1

Figure A-15. Removing the bezel and the cover from the internal drive
5. Inspect the drive to decide which of the following conditions most closely
matches the symptom on the drive:
• Tape spooled off the supply reel - All the tape appears to be on the takeup
reel and no tape is on the supply reel (inside the cartridge). Test the drive after
the procedure is completed.
• Tape pulled from leader pin (or broken at the front end) - All the tape
appears to be on the supply reel (inside the cartridge) and very little or no tape
appears to be on the takeup reel. The leader block is positioned in the takeup
reel. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
• Tape broken in mid-tape - Tape appears to be on both the supply reel (inside
the cartridge) and takeup reel. Test the drive after the procedure is completed.
• Tape tangled along tape path - Tape appears to be tangled and damaged but
intact. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
• No damage to tape (or no apparent failure) - There appears to be no damage
or slack to the tape. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.

Tape Spooled off Supply Reel

Important: DO NOT TOUCH THE OUTER GUIDE RAIL ( 2 in Figure A-16).

THIS RAIL IS VERY DELICATE AND EASILY DAMAGED.

1. From the takeup reel, pull an arm’s length of tape around the rear of the tape
path and over the head and rollers on the left side of the drive.
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
3. Make sure the tape is not twisted. Untwist tape if required.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the
tape end and feed it onto the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
5. Turn the supply reel ( 4 in Figure A-16) clockwise, allowing the moistened tape
to adhere to the hub as it winds around the supply reel (inside the cartridge).

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-13

 2

a82hd002
4

Figure A-16. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor

6. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the
flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel ( 4 in Figure A-16) 10
additional turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
7. Reassemble the drive, reversing the steps in “Beginning Procedure” on
page A-12.
8. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

A-14 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin

a82hd003
2

Figure A-17. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train

1 Threader intermediate gear 3 Loader motor worm gear

2 Threader mechanism gear

1. Pull out tape from the takeup reel.

Note: If there is more than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup reel,
go to “Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-16.

2. If there is less than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup reel, cut off
the excess tape as close to the leader pin, as possible.
3. Reattach the leader pin to the remaining tape.
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear ( 1 in Figure A-17) near the rear of the
drive. You can use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear ( 1 in
Figure A-17) and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear ( 2 in Figure A-17)
clockwise. This draws the tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.
5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you should hear the leader pin
retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue
rolling until the threader intermediate gear ( 1 in Figure A-17) stops. The LBA is
in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge.

6. Rotate the loader motor worm gear ( 3 in Figure A-17 and 1 in Figure A-18)
clockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops. This releases the
LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader intermediate gear ( 1 in Figure A-17) counterclockwise until
the leader block is in front of the Read/Write head. This moves the LBA out of
the cartridge.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-15

 a82hd004
1 2

Figure A-18. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

1 Loader motor worm gear 2 Leader block assembly (LBA)

8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear ( 3 in Figure A-17) counterclockwise as

viewed from the front of the drive until it stops.
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 4 in “Beginning
Procedure” on page A-12.
11. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

Tape Broken in Mid-tape

1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm’s length of tape out of the
takeup reel. From the takeup reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path
and over the head rollers on the left side of the drive.

Note: If there is less than approximately 5 cm (2 in.) of tape on the takeup reel,
go to “Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin” on page A-15.

2. From the supply reel inside the cartridge, pull approximately 0.3 m (1 ft.) of tape.
3. Make sure the tape is not twisted. Untwist tape if required.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water, and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the
tape end. Overlap the tape ends, loosely mending them together.
5. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
6. Turn the supply reel ( 4 in Figure A-19) clockwise, carefully guiding the mended
portion of the tape to wind around the hub of the supply reel located inside the
cartridge. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut. The tape
must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel
( 4 in Figure A-19) 10 additional turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.

A-16 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 2

a82hd002
4

Figure A-19. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor

7. Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 4 in “Beginning

Procedure” on page A-12.
8. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

Tape Tangled along Tape Path

1. Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle.
If you find the tape to be broken, go to one of the following appropriate
procedures:
• “Tape Spooled off Supply Reel” on page A-13
• “Tape Pulled from or Broken near Leader Pin” on page A-15
• “Tape Broken in Mid-tape” on page A-16
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-17

 2

a82hd002
4

Figure A-20. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor

3. Turn the supply reel ( 4 in Figure A-20) clockwise.

4. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the
flanges of the tape guiding rollers. turn the supply reel ( 4 in Figure A-20) 10
turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
5. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

A-18 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 No Apparent Failure or Damage to Tape
1. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

a82hd002
4

Figure A-21. Rewinding tape into cartridge

1 Loader motor worm gear 3 Takeup reel motor

2 Outer guide rail 4 Supply reel motor

2. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the supply reel motor
( 4 in Figure A-21) clockwise.
3. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the
flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
Continue spooling until all tape is removed from the takeup reel ( 3 in
Figure A-21).
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear ( 1 in Figure A-22) near the rear of the
drive. You can use your finger to rotate the threader intermediate gear ( 1 in
Figure A-22) and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear ( 2 in Figure A-22)
clockwise. This draws the tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-19

 1

a82hd003
2

Figure A-22. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train

1 Threader intermediate gear 3 Loader motor worm gear

2 Threader mechanism gear

5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you should hear the leader pin
retention spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue
rolling until the threader intermediate gear ( 1 in Figure A-22) stops. The LBA is
in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge.

6. Rotate the loader intermediate gear ( 3 in Figure A-22 and 1 in Figure A-23)
clockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it stops. This releases the
LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader motor worm gear ( 3 in Figure A-23) counterclockwise until
the leader block is in front of the Read/Write head. This moves the LBA out of
the cartridge.
a82hd004

1 2

Figure A-23. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

1 Loader motor worm gear 2 Leader block assembly (LBA)

A-20 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear ( 3 in Figure A-23) counterclockwise as
viewed from the front of the drive until it stops.
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Reassemble the drive by reversing the procedure in Step 4 in “Beginning
Procedure” on page A-12.
11. Reassemble the library chassis. See “Ending Procedure” on page A-21.

Ending Procedure
1. Reinstall the drive in the library. See “Removing/reinstalling the Tape Drive
from/in the Library” on page A-10.
2. Reinstall the library chassis cover. See “Removing/reinstalling the Library
Chassis Cover” on page A-5.
3. Return the failed library to IBM.

Removing a Stuck Cartridge Magazine

Complete the following steps to remove a stuck cartridge magazine from the library.
1. Turn OFF the power to the library.
2. Manually unlock the cartridge magazine and try to remove it from the library.
Stop if you feel any resistance while pulling on the magazine (see “Unlocking the
Cartridge Magazine Manually” on page 8-1). If you cannot remove the magazine,
proceed to the next step.
3. Disconnect all cables from the rear panel of the library.
4. Remove the library cover(s). See “Removing/reinstalling the Library Chassis
Cover” on page A-5.
5. Remove the magazine from the library and check for any damaged cartridges.
6. Reassemble the library, reversing the steps used to disassemble the library.
7. Return the defective library to IBM.

Appendix A. Information for Trained IBM Service Personnel A-21

A-22 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix B. Error Codes

“Library Error Codes” on page B-1

“Drive Error Codes” on page B-9
“Web User Interface Error Messages” on page B-10
“Trap Definitions (Types)” on page B-12

When an error occurs during operation of the library, the library stops the current
operation and displays an error code on the Operator Panel. Unless otherwise noted,
try to resolve the problem by cycling power to the library and retrying the last
operation.

Note: When power cycling the library, wait 10 seconds after the power is switched
OFF before powering ON again.

Library Error Codes

Table B-1. Library error codes

Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
No valid error code
0000 -
information.
At power-on initialization, a 1. Upgrade/reinstall firmware and try again.
0001 All 4 LEDs ON
firmware error was detected. 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
At power-on initialization, a Ready/Activity LED • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
0002 RAM (base area) error was ON and Error LED before resuming normal library operations.
detected. ON • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
At power-on initialization, a Technical Support” on page 7-1.
0003 RAM (buffer area) error was CHK 0003
detected.
1. Observe LEDs. See “Interpreting Front Panel
LEDs” on page 6-8.
2. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-10.
A usable drive could not be
0008 CHK 0008 3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
detected.
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 B-1

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
1. Observe LEDs. See “Interpreting Front Panel
LEDs” on page 6-8.
2. Confirm the DHCP server settings.
3. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
Information acquisition from page 6-10.
0010 -
the DHCP server failed. 4. Cycle the power supply and try again.
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
1. Observe LEDs. See “Interpreting Front Panel
LEDs” on page 6-8.
2. Confirm the time server settings.
3. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
Time acquisition from the page 6-10.
0011 -
NTP server failed. 4. Cycle the power supply and try again.
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
LDI I/F error. 1. Observe LEDs. See “Interpreting Front Panel
0020 Transmit data abnormality - LEDs” on page 6-8.
detected (NAK reception). 2. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
LDI I/F error. page 6-10.
0021 Receive timeout detected - 3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
(ACK/NAK reception). • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
LDI I/F error.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
0022 Response packet reception -
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
timeout detected.
LDI I/F error.
0023 ENQ receive timeout -
detected.
LDI I/F error.
0024 Receive data abnormality -
detected.
Encryption command 1. Confirm the Encryption Key Manager settings.
0029 -
terminates unsuccessfully. 2. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-10.
3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Commands to the Encryption
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
002A Key Manager over the retry -
before resuming normal library operations.
limit.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
1. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-10.
Commands to the encryption 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
002B capable drive over the retry - • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
limit. before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.

B-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
LDI I/F error. Cycle the power supply and try again.
002C ACK IU event timeout - • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
detected. before resuming normal library operations.
LDI I/F error. • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
002D Response IU event timeout - Technical Support” on page 7-1.
detected.
LDI I/F error.
002E Transfer Ready IU event -
timeout detected.
LDI I/F error.
002F -
Undefined error detected.
1. Verify that the cartridge is compatible with the
drive in your library. See “Media” on page 1-8.
2. Verify that the cartridge is not write-protected.
See “Write-Protect Switch” on page 5-7.
3. If it is a cleaning cartridge, verify that the
A drive media error detected cartridge has not expired. See “Viewing the
0040 CHK 0040
upon insertion. Library Map” on page 4-16.
4. Cycle the power supply and try again.
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Cycle the power supply and try again.
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
A drive load timeout error
0042 CHK 0042 before resuming normal library operations.
detected upon insertion.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Response acknowledge error 1. Initiate an inventory. See “Conducting a Library
received from bar code Inventory” on page 4-6 (Operator Panel) or
0053 CHK 0053
reader. Suspect the bar code “Conducting a Library Inventory” on page 4-19
reader cable connection. (Web User Interface).
Receive data checksum error 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
received from bar code • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
0056 CHK 0056
reader. Suspect the bar code before resuming normal library operations.
reader cable connection. • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Invalid data received from Technical Support” on page 7-1.
bar code reader. Suspect the
0057 CHK 0057
bar code reader cable
connection.
A bar code reader read-error
0058 detected. Suspect the bar CHK 0058
code reader cable connection.
A bar code reader FLASH
control error detected.
0059 CHK 0059
Suspect the bar code reader
cable connection.
A bar code reader
diagnostics error detected.
005A CHK 005A
Suspect the bar code reader
cable connection.

Appendix B. Error Codes B-3

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
2
I C I/F error. 1. Initiate an inventory. See “Conducting a Library
Invalid signal (NAK) Inventory” on page 4-6 (Operator Panel) or
005D CHK 005D “Conducting a Library Inventory” on page 4-19
detected. Suspect the bar
code reader cable connection. (Web User Interface).
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
I2C I/F error. • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
005E Bus arbitration lost error CHK 005E before resuming normal library operations.
detected. Suspect the bar • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
code reader cable connection. Technical Support” on page 7-1.
I2C I/F error.
005F Ready condition does not CHK 005F
occur. Suspect the bar code
reader cable connection.
1. Attempt to unload the cartridge from the
Accessor. See “Moving Cartridges” on page 4-5
(Operator Panel) or “Moving Cartridges” on
Calibration failed because the page 4-17 (Web User Interface).
0070 Accessor contains media. CHK 0070 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Suspect the centering sensor. • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Calibration failed due to an Cycle the power supply and try again.
0071 empty magazine. Suspect the CHK 0071 • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
magazine set sensor. before resuming normal library operations.
Calibration measurement • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
invalid data error. Suspect Technical Support” on page 7-1.
0072 CHK 0072
the centering sensor, X motor,
or P motor.
GET, centering check, or bar
code reader read operation
0074 failed because the Accessor CHK 0074
contains media. Suspect the
centering sensor.
PUT operation failed because
the Accessor contains no
0075 CHK 0075
media. Suspect the centering
sensor.
1. If the cartridge does not eject, try to unload the
cartridge from the drive using the Operator
Panel (Commands → Unload) or the Web User
Interface (Manage Library → Unload). Move
Drive does not enter EJECT the cartridge from the drive to the I/O Station.
state (and media not ejected) Remove the cartridge from the library and
007C CHK 007C inspect for damage and replace, if necessary.
within 200 seconds of a GET
command. Suspect the drive. 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.

B-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
Drive does not enter Cycle the power supply and try again.
MOUNT state within 200 • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
007D CHK 007D
seconds of a PUT command. before resuming normal library operations.
Suspect the drive or X motor. • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Drive does not enter SET Technical Support” on page 7-1.
state within 3 seconds of a
007E CHK 007E
PUT command. Suspect the
drive or X motor.
1. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
page 6-10.
Drive I/F or connection error
2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
occurs during a PUT
007F CHK 007F • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
operation or GET operation.
Suspect the drive. before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
X movement error #1. Cycle the power supply and try again.
During X movement, the • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
target stop position’s origin before resuming normal library operations.
0080 CHK 0080
sensor error detected. • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Suspect the X origin sensor or Technical Support” on page 7-1.
X motor.
X movement error #2.
During X movement, a motor
0081 sync error detected. Suspect CHK 0081
the X encoder sensor or X
motor.
X movement error #3.
During initialization, a motor
0082 sync error detected. Suspect CHK 0082
the X encoder sensor or X
motor.
During an eject operation or
move operation (to a storage
position), the X origin sensor
0083 CHK 0083
could not be detected.
Suspect the X origin sensor or
X motor.
During initialization, the X
origin position could not be
0084 CHK 0084
detected. Suspect the X origin
sensor or X motor.
X calibration error #1.
During X calibration,
centering sensor OFF
0088 CHK 0088
condition could not be
detected. Suspect the
centering sensor or X motor.
X calibration error #2.
During X calibration,
0089 centering sensor ON CHK 0089
condition could not be
detected.

Appendix B. Error Codes B-5

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
X calibration error #3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
During X-drive calibration, • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
centering sensor OFF before resuming normal library operations.
008A condition could not be CHK 008A • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
detected. Suspect the Technical Support” on page 7-1.
centering sensor, X motor, or
P motor.
X calibration error #4.
During X-drive calibration,
centering sensor ON
008B condition could not be CHK 008B
detected. Suspect the
centering sensor, X motor, or
P motor.
1. Confirm the magazine is closed.
During X operation, the 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
cartridge magazine was • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
008F CHK 008F
removed. Suspect the before resuming normal library operations.
magazine set sensor. • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
1. Confirm the media is compatible.
Failed to detect media in the 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Accessor at completion of
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
00B0 GET operation. Suspect the CHK 00B0
before resuming normal library operations.
centering sensor, X motor, or
P motor. • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Cycle the power supply and try again.
No media is contained in the
• If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
specified cell (Cell Empty).
00B1 CHK 00B1 before resuming normal library operations.
Suspect the centering sensor,
X motor, or P motor. • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Media detected in the 1. If the cartridge remains in the Accessor, try to
Accessor at completion of move the cartridge from the Accessor to the I/O
00B2 CHK 00B2
centering check operation. Station using the Operator Panel or Web User
Suspect the centering sensor. Interface. Remove the cartridge from the library
and inspect for damage and replace, if
necessary.
Media detected in the 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Accessor at completion of • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
00B3 CHK 00B3
PUT operation. Suspect the before resuming normal library operations.
centering sensor.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Accessor error #1. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Reverse REV position (PP1) • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
error (Accessor origin not before resuming normal library operations.
00B8 detected or FWD position CHK 00B8 • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
detected). Suspect the P Technical Support” on page 7-1.
origin sensor, FWD sensor, or
P motor.

B-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
Accessor error #2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Forward FWD position (PP2) • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
error (Accessor origin before resuming normal library operations.
00B9 detected or FWD not CHK 00B9 • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
detected). Suspect the P Technical Support” on page 7-1.
origin sensor, FWD sensor, or
P motor.
Accessor error #3.
PUT/GET/bar code reader
position
(PP4/PP5/PPBF/PPBR)
00BA CHK 00BA
error (Accessor origin or
FWD detected, or cell full).
Suspect the P origin sensor,
FWD sensor, or P motor.
During initialization, the
Accessor origin could not be
00BC detected. Suspect the P origin CHK 00BC
sensor, FWD sensor, or P
motor.
During Accessor movement,
the movement stop condition
00BD CHK 00BD
detected. Suspect the P
encoder sensor or P motor.
No gap condition detected at
the completion of Accessor
operation. Suspect the
00BF CHK 00BF
centering sensor, P origin
sensor, FWD sensor, or P
motor.
1. Confirm the magazine is closed.
Accessor operation disabled 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
because a cartridge magazine • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
00C0 CHK 00C0
was removed. Suspect the before resuming normal library operations.
magazine set sensor. • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Centering calibration error Cycle the power supply and try again.
#1. • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
During centering calibration, before resuming normal library operations.
00C8 centering sensor OFF CHK 00C8 • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
condition could not be Technical Support” on page 7-1.
detected. Suspect the
centering sensor or P motor.
Centering calibration error
#2.
During centering calibration,
centering sensor ON
00C9 CHK 00C9
condition could not be
detected. Suspect the
centering sensor, X motor, or
P motor.

Appendix B. Error Codes B-7

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
Checksum error detected 1. Confirm the firmware file version.
00D0 CHK 00D0
during firmware update. 2. Reinstall the firmware file.
Firmware ID error detected 3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
00D1 CHK 00D1
during firmware update. • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
Boot information error before resuming normal library operations.
00D2 detected during firmware CHK 00D2 • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
update. Technical Support” on page 7-1.
1. Initiate an inventory. See “Conducting a Library
Inventory” on page 4-6 (Operator Panel) or
Bar code reader is not in “Conducting a Library Inventory” on page 4-19
maintenance mode during (Web User Interface).
bar code reader firmware
00D3 CHK 00D3 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
update (operation
interrupted). Suspect the bar • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
code reader cable connection. before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Magazine failed to unlock. 1. Cycle the power supply and try again.
00D9 Suspect the magazine or CHK 00D9 2. Manually unlock the magazine, remove the
magazine sensor. magazine from the library, and inspect it for
damage.
I/O Station failed to unlock. • If not damaged, return it to the library and
00DA Suspect the magazine or CHK 00DA run Library Verify before resuming normal
magazine sensor. library operations.
• If damaged, replace the magazine.
1. Initiate an inventory. See “Conducting a Library
Inventory” on page 4-6 (Operator Panel) or
“Conducting a Library Inventory” on page 4-19
An error detected during bar (Web User Interface).
code reader firmware check.
00DD CHK 00DD 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Suspect the bar code reader
cable connection. • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Write operation not finished Cycle the power supply and try again.
00E0 within 1 ms when writing CHK 00E0 • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
data to flash memory. before resuming normal library operations.
Clear operation not finished • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
within 10 seconds when Technical Support” on page 7-1.
00E1 CHK 00E1
clearing a sector in flash
memory.
Error detected in tape library
00E2 configuration stored in flash CHK 00E2
memory.
Checksum error detected in
00E3 CHK 00E3
flash memory.
Sensor error #1.
Accessor encoder sensor B
00F0 error detected during blink CHK 00F0
check. Suspect the Accessor
encoder sensor B.

B-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table B-1. Library error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel Indication Action Required
Sensor error #2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Accessor encoder sensor A • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
00F1 error detected during blink CHK 00F1 before resuming normal library operations.
check. Suspect the Accessor • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
encoder sensor A. Technical Support” on page 7-1.
Sensor error #3.
X encoder sensor error
00F2 CHK 00F2
detected during blink check.
Suspect the X encoder sensor.
Sensor error #4.
Magazine sensor error
00F3 CHK 00F3
detected during blink check.
Suspect the magazine sensor.
Sensor error #5.
X origin sensor error detected
00F8 CHK 00F8
during blink check. Suspect
the X origin sensor.
Sensor error #6.
Cartridge sensor error
00F9 CHK 00F9
detected during blink check.
Suspect the cartridge sensor.
Sensor error #7.
Accessor forward sensor
00FA error detected during blink CHK 00FA
check. Suspect the Accessor
forward sensor.
Sensor error #8.
Accessor origin sensor error
00FB detected during blink check. CHK 00FB
Suspect the Accessor origin
sensor.

Drive Error Codes

Table B-2. Drive error codes

Code (H) Description Panel indication Action Required
Invalid data sent to drive. 1. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
0200 CHK 0200
NAK detected. page 6-10.
Timeout error occurred while 2. Cycle the power supply and try again.
0201 waiting for response from CHK 0201 • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
drive. before resuming normal library operations.
0203 Drive disconnected. CHK 0203 • If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
0205 Drive busy. CHK 0205
Command could not be
0206 executed because drive is not CHK 0206
mounted.
Drive media eject timeout
0220 CHK 0220
detected.

Appendix B. Error Codes B-9

Table B-2. Drive error codes (continued)
Code (H) Description Panel indication Action Required
1. Release the drive Prevent Medium Removal
state from the host.
2. Reseat all cables. See “Reseating Cables” on
Media could not be ejected page 6-10.
0222 because drive is in Prevent CHK 0222 3. Cycle the power supply and try again.
Medium Removal state. • If the problem is corrected, run Library Verify
before resuming normal library operations.
• If the problem persists, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.

Web User Interface Error Messages

Table B-3. Web user error messages

Title Message Issuing Panel
Error Users full. User Access
You cannot remove yourself. User Access
Parameter Error Login failure. Login
Unsupported update file. Firmware Update
Invalid parameter found in [***]. Configure Library
Please input parameter of [***]. Configure Library
Password parameter error. User Access
User name parameter error. User Access
Not enough role. User Access
An user name unmatched. User Access
An user is already existed. User Access
Users full. User Access
Flush ROM write error detected. User Access
User information access failure. User Access
Command Error Move command execution failure. (Code:”****”) Move Cartridges
Unload execution failure:[****]. Unload Drive
Drive not ready. Unload Drive,
Download Drive Logs,
Firmware Update
Medium not present. Unload Drive
Online command execution failure:[****]. Library State
Offline command execution failure:[****]. Library State
Reset command execution failure:[****]. Reset Library/Drive
Inventory command execution failure:[****]. Inventory
“Normal Dump” command execution failure:[****]. Download Drive Logs
“Force Dump” command execution failure:[****]. Download Drive Logs
Restore failure. Save/Restore
Library serial number is unmatched
Writing to cookie was failure. All
The configuration data was not saved to cookie.

B-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table B-3. Web user error messages (continued)
Title Message Issuing Panel
Cleaning Command Illegal medium loaded. Clean Drive
Error Source element empty. Clean Drive
Destination element full. Clean Drive
Drive failure. Clean Drive
Prevent medium removal. Clean Drive
During import/export element access. Clean Drive
Gap detected. Clean Drive
Tape not loaded. Clean Drive
Expired medium loaded. Clean Drive
Write protect error. Clean Drive
Cleaning execution failure: [****]. Clean Drive
I/O Error File open failure. Download Drive Logs,
Download Library Logs,
Save/Restore,
Firmware Update
Unsupported file. Save/Restore,
Firmware Update
Network Error *** command transmission failure. Manage Library
*** information access failure. All
Library logs download failure. Download Library Logs
Please retry download.
E-mail submit failure. Notifications
SNMP trap submit failure. Notifications
Log data access failure. Traces,
View Library Logs
Port open failure [**.**.**.**:****]. Applet 3 times retry
Do you wish to retry?
Port open failure [**.**.**.**:****]. Displayed after 3
Please check the library and the network condition setting. unsuccessful attempts using
Applet shutdown. the Java Applet.

Web interface version is not matched between Library and Java All
Applet.
Please shut a browser and restart the Applet.
There is a possibility of malfunctioning if you proceed
operation from Web.
Please clear the cache of Java when this message appears even
if it restart.
Library Busy Library information updating now. All
Can not access library information

Appendix B. Error Codes B-11

Trap Definitions (Types)
The TS2900 Tape Autoloader supports the following types of SNMP traps.

Table B-4. Trap list

Clean Drive Attention
Trap ID Event Type Description Error LED
LED LED
1 Emergency • Drive error – – ON
2 • Library error – – ON
21 Error • Drive error – – ON
22 • Library error – – ON
51 Warning • Drive error – – ON
(Drive) • Library error
52 • Endurance frequency attainment
(Library)
53 • Cleaning demand reception from drive ON – –
(Drive)
54 • Cleaning cartridge demand for an – ON –
(Library) exchange
101 Information • Beginning of inventory – – –
(Drive) • Change in library operation mode
102 • Beginning of medium move
(Library) • Completion of medium move
• Library/Drive not ready
• Library/Drive to online
• Magazine unlock operation
• I/O Station unlock operation

B-12 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags

“TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library” on page C-1

“TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive” on page C-3

This appendix is intended to provide additional information to the reader about the
tape library and tape drive. All error code and diagnostic information contained in
this chapter cannot be accessed from the Operator Panel of the Library. The Operator
Panel will, however, display other library error codes and drive error codes when
problems occur. For a listing of Operator Panel error messages, see Appendix B,
“Error Codes,” on page B-1.

TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems experienced by

devices such as tape drives, autoloaders, and libraries. The standard enables a server
to read TapeAlert messages (called flags) from a tape drive. The server reads the flags
from Log Sense Page 0x2E.

This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology, which provides error and
diagnostic information about the drives and the library to the server. Because library
and drive firmware may change periodically, the SNMP interface in the library does
not require code changes if devices add additional TapeAlerts that are not supported
today. However, should this occur the MIB is written to minimize impact to the
SNMP monitoring station. At the time of this writing, the TapeAlert flags in this
appendix correctly represent TapeAlerts that will be sent. The MIB file should not be
taken to mean that all traps that are defined in the MIB will be sent by the library or
that they will be sent in the future.

TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Library

Table C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the library

Flag
Number
Flag Name Description Action Required Type1

01 Library Hardware A The library mechanism is having 1. Cycle the power supply and try C
trouble communicating with the again.
tape drive. 2. If the problem persists, see
02 Library Hardware B The library mechanism has a “Contacting IBM Technical W
hardware fault. Support” on page 7-1.
03 Library Hardware C Library mechanism has a hardware 1. Reset the library. For details, see C
fault that requires a reset to recover. “Rebooting the Drive” on
page 4-7.
2. Restart the operation.
3. If the problem persists, see
“Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-1.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 C-1

Table C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the library (continued)
Flag
Number
Flag Name Description Action Required Type1

04 Library Hardware D The library mechanism has a 1. Cycle the power supply and try C
hardware fault that is not again.
mechanism related, or requires 2. If the problem persists, see
power cycle to recover. “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-1.
06 Library Interface The library has identified an 1. Check all cables and cable C
interface fault. connections.
2. Restart the operation.
3. If the problem persists, see
“Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-1.
08 Library Maintenance Library preventative maintenance Preventative maintenance of the W
required. library is required. Consult the library
user’s manual for device-specific
preventative maintenance tasks.
12 Library Stray Tape A cartridge has been left in the drive 1. Try unloading the cartridge from C
inside the library by a previous the drive using the Operator Panel
hardware fault. or Web User Interface.
• If the cartridge unloads, move
the cartridge from the drive to
the I/O Station. Remove the
cartridge and inspect for
damage. If not damaged, return
the cartridge to the library. Run
Library Verify before resuming
normal library operations.
• If the cartridge did not unload
from the drive, cycle the power
supply and try again.
2. If the problem persists, see
“Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-1.
13 Library Pick Retry There is a potential problem with the No action is required. W
drive ejecting a cartridge short or
with the library mechanism picking
a cartridge from a slot.
14 Library Place Retry There is a potential problem with the No action is required. W
library mechanism placing a
cartridge into a slot.
16 Library I/O Station The operation has failed because the Close the I/O Station. W
library I/O Station is open.
17 Library Mailslot Mechanical problem with the I/O There is a mechanical problem with C
Station. the library I/O Station.
18 Library Magazine Library magazine not present. The library cannot operate without C
the magazine.
1. Insert the magazine into the
library.
2. Restart the operation.
21 Library Offline Library manually turned offline. The library has been manually turned I
offline and is unavailable for use.

C-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table C-1. TapeAlert flags supported by the library (continued)
Flag
Number
Flag Name Description Action Required Type1

22 Library Drive Offline Library turned internal drive offline. The drive inside the library has been I
taken offline. This is for information
purposes only. No action is required.
23 Library Scan Retry There is a potential problem with the No action is required. W
bar code label of the scanner
hardware in the library mechanism.
28 Power Supply PSU failure inside the library The power supply has failed inside W
subsystem. the library. See “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
1. C = Critical: Needs immediate action.
W = Warning: Action to be taken.
I = Information: Information for user.

TapeAlert Flags Supported by the Ultrium Tape Drive

Table C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive

Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required
Number
3 Hard error Set for any unrecoverable read, write, or See the action required for Flag Number
positioning error (this flag is set in 4, 5, or 6, if set, in this table.
conjunction with flags 4, 5, or 6).
4 Media Set for any unrecoverable read, write, or Replace the tape cartridge.
positioning error that is due to a faulty
tape cartridge.
5 Read failure Set for any unrecoverable read error If Flag Number 4 is also set, the tape
where the isolation is uncertain and cartridge is defective. Replace the tape
failure could be due to a faulty tape cartridge.
cartridge or drive hardware.
6 Write failure Set for any unrecoverable write or If Flag Number 9 is also set, make sure
positioning error where isolation is that the write-protect switch is set so that
uncertain and failure could be due to a data can be written to the tape. See
faulty tape cartridge. “Write-Protect Switch” on page 6-7.
If Flag Number 4 is also set, the tape
cartridge is defective. Replace the tape
cartridge.
7 Media life Set when the tape cartridge reaches its 1. Copy the data to another tap
end of life (EOL). cartridge.
2. Discard the old (EOL) tape.
8 Not data grade Set when the tape cartridge is not Replace the tape cartridge with a
data-grade. Any data that you back up data-grade tape cartridge.
to the tape is at risk.
9 Write protect Set when the tape drive detects that the Ensure that the cartridge’s write-protect
tape cartridge is write-protected. switch is set so that data can be written to
the tape. See “Write-Protect Switch” on
page 6-7.

Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags C-3

Table C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive (continued)
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required
Number
10 No removal Set when the tape drive receives an Refer to the documentation for your
UNLOAD command after the server server’s operating system.
prevented the tape cartridge from being
removed.
11 Cleaning media Set when a cleaning tape is loaded into No action required. Status only.
the drive.
12 Unsupported format Set when a non-supported cartridge Replace the invalid cartridge with a
type is loaded into the drive or when supported tape cartridge.
the cartridge format has been
corrupted.
14 Unrecoverable snapped Set when the operation failed because Do not attempt to extract the tape
tape the tape in the drive snapped. cartridge. See “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-1
15 Cartridge memory chip Set when a cartridge memory (CM) Replace the tape cartridge.
failure failure is detected on the loaded tape
cartridge.
16 Forced eject Set when a tape cartridge was unloaded No action required. Status only.
manually while the drive was reading
or writing.
17 Media loaded is Set when a cartridge marked as No action required. Status only.
Read-only format read-only is loaded into the drive. The
flag is cleared when the cartridge is
ejected.
18 Tape directory Set when the tape drive detects that the Re-read all data from the tape to rebuild
corrupted in cartridge tape directory in the cartridge memory the tape directory.
memory has been corrupted.
19 Nearing media life Set when the tape cartridge is nearing 1. Copy the data to another tape
its specified end of life. It is cleared cartridge.
when the cartridge is removed from the 2. Replace the tape cartridge.
drive.
20 Clean now Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive.
needs cleaning.
21 Clean periodic Set when the tape drive detects that it Clean the tape drive as soon as possible.
needs routine cleaning. The drive can continue to operate, but
requires cleaning soon.
22 Expired cleaning media Set when the tape drive detects a Replace the cleaning cartridge.
cleaning cartridge that has expired.
23 Invalid cleaning Set when the drive expects a cleaning Use a valid cleaning cartridge.
cartridge cartridge to be loaded and the loaded
cartridge is not a cleaning cartridge.
30 Hardware A Set when a hardware failure occurs that See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
requires that you reset the tape drive to on page 7-1.
recover.
31 Hardware B Set when the tape drive fails its internal Note the error code on the
Power-On Self-Tests (POSTs). single-character display and see
“Contacting IBM Technical Support” on
page 7-1.
32 Interface Set when the tape drive detects a See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
problem with the host interface. on page 7-1.

C-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive (continued)
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required
Number
33 Eject media Set when a failure occurs that requires Unload the tape cartridge, then reinsert
the tape cartridge to be unloaded from and restart the operation. If this fails, use
the drive. different media.
34 Download fail Set when an FMR image is Check the FMR image is correct. If
unsuccessfully downloaded to the tape necessary, download the correct FMR
drive via the SAS interface. image.
36 Drive temperature Set when the drive temperature sensor See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
indicates that the drive’s temperature on page 7-1.
exceeds the recommended temperature
of the library.
37 Drive voltage Set when the drive detects power See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
supply voltages that approach or on page 7-1.
exceed the specified voltage limits.
38 Predictive failure of Set when a hardware failure of the tape See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
drive hardware drive is predicted. on page 7-1.
39 Diagnostics required Set when the tape drive detects a failure See “Contacting IBM Technical Support”
that requires diagnostics for isolation. on page 7-1.
51 Tape directory invalid Set when the tape directory on the tape Use your backup software to rebuild the
at unload cartridge that was previously unloaded tape directory by reading all the data.
is corrupted. The file-search
performance is degraded.
52 Tape system area write Set when the tape cartridge that was Copy the data to another tape cartridge,
failure previously unloaded could not write its then discard the old tape cartridge.
system area successfully.
53 Tape system area read Set when the tape system area could not Copy the data to another tape cartridge,
failure be read successfully at load time. then discard the old tape cartridge.
55 Load failure Set when a hardware malfunction If the tape cartridge will not load in the
prevents the tape cartridge from being drive:
loaded into the drive, or when a tape 1. Remove the tape cartridge from the
cartridge is stuck in the drive. library and inspect it for damage. If
damaged, discard it.
2. Insert another tape cartridge into the
tape drive. If the problem persists, see
“Contacting IBM Technical Support”
on page 7-1.
If the tape cartridge is stuck in the drive:
1. Attempt to unload the tape from the
drive using the host backup
application that is currently using the
drive, or via the remote or local UI.
2. If the cartridge will still not unload,
see “Contacting IBM Technical
Support” on page 7-1.

Appendix C. TapeAlert Flags C-5

Table C-2. TapeAlert flags supported by the Ultrium tape drive (continued)
Flag
Flag Name Description Action Required
Number
56 Unload failure Set when a drive hardware error 1. Unload the cartridge from the drive
prevents the tape cartridge from being using the Operator Panel or the Web
unloaded from the tape drive, or when User Interface.
the tape cartridge is stuck in the drive. 2. Try a power cycle of the entire library.
This causes the drive to reset and
attempt to rewind and unload when
power is restored. If the cartridge
unloads, remove it from the library
and inspect it. If damaged, discard it.
3. Try to unload the cartridge from the
drive again using the Operator Panel
or the Web User Interface.
4. If the cartridge will still not unload
from the drive, see “Contacting IBM
Technical Support” on page 7-1.
59 WORM Media integrity Set when the drive determines that the 1. Copy the data to another WORM tape
check failed data on the tape is suspect from a cartridge.
WORM point of view. 2. Discard the old WORM tape.
60 WORM Media Set when the drive rejects a write Append the information on a WORM
overwrite attempted operation because the rules for allowing tape cartridge or write the data to a
WORM writes have not been met. Data non-WORM cartridge.
can only be appended to WORM media.
Overwrites to WORM media are not
allowed.

C-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Appendix D. Sense Data

“Sense Key Definitions” on page D-1

“Library Sense Data” on page D-2
“Tape Drive Sense Data” on page D-3

When a drive encounters an error, it makes sense data available. You can use IBM
device drivers to examine the sense data and determine errors. Instructions for
downloading, installing, and properly configuring the IBM device drivers are
available in the IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guide. The IBM
device drivers may conflict with some commercial software applications unless
properly configured. To avoid conflicts on Windows operating systems, refer to your
device driver’s procedures for setting the driver to manual startup mode. For
applications that use Open Systems device drivers that are provided by IBM (for
example, AIX, Linux, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, Windows 2003, and Windows 2000), the
IBM Ultrium Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guide contains information about
how to obtain sense data after an error has occurred.

If your application uses other device drivers, see the appropriate documentation for
those drivers to obtain the sense data.

Raw sense data (as returned from the drive) is documented in the IBM TotalStorage
LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.

Sense Key Definitions

Table D-1. Sense key definitions
SK Definition
00 No Sense
01 Recovered Error
02 Not Ready
03 Media Error
04 Hardware Error
05 Illegal Request
06 Unit Attention
07 Data Protect
08 Blank Check
09 Reserved
0A Reserved
0B Aborted Command
0C Reserved
0D Volume Overflow
0E Reserved
0F Reserved

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 D-1

Library Sense Data
Table D-2 lists the Additional Sense Codes (ASC) and Additional Sense Code
Qualifiers (ASCQ) associated with the reported Sense Keys.

A sense key of 00h (no sense) has no ASC/ASCQ associated with it. A few
ASC/ASCQs can be associated with more than one sense key. The sense keys that can
give a particular ASC/ASCQ are indicated within the Sense Key column.

Table D-2. Library sense data

Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
No Sense 00 00 No sense
(00) 30 03 Cleaning cartridge installed
Recovered 5B 02 Log counter at maximum
Error (01)
Not Ready 04 00 Logical unit not ready, cause not reportable
(02) 04 01 Logical unit is in process of becoming ready
04 03 Manual intervention required
3A 02 Media not present (tray open)
80 05 During reprogramming mode
Hardware 15 01 Mechanical position error
Error (04) 40 nn Diagnostic failure on component nn (80h-ffh)
44 00 Internal target failure
80 04 Fan alarm
80 07 NVRAM failure
Illegal 1A 00 Parameter list length error
Request (05) 20 00 Invalid command operation code
21 01 Invalid element address
24 00 Invalid field in CDB
25 00 Logical unit not supported
26 00 Invalid field in parameter list
30 00 Incompatible medium installed
3B 0D Media destination element full
3B 0E Media source element empty
3B 83 Source drive not unloaded
53 02 Media removal prevented
80 10 Drive failure
80 20 Exchange slot full
Unit 28 00 Not-ready to ready transition, media may have changed
Attention 28 01 Import or export element accessed
(06)
29 00 Power ON occurred
2A 02 Log parameter changed
3F 01 Microcode has been changed
41 FE Drive error message detected*

D-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Table D-2. Library sense data (continued)
Sense Key ASC ASCQ Description
Aborted 41 nn LDI command failure**
Command
(0B)
* This code is preserved only in the library log when “FID” or “ATTN DRV”
message is received from the tape drive. This code is not reported to the host
server.
** This code is preserved only in the library log. This code is not reported to the host
server.

Tape Drive Sense Data

Table D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data
Bit Address or Name
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Valid Error Code
Address Bit
1 Segment Number x’00’
2 Filemark EOM ILI Reserved Sense Key
(End of (Incorrect See “Sense Key Definitions” on page D-1.
medium) length
indicator
3 Information byte (most significant byte)
4–5 Information bytes
6 Information byte (least significant byte)
7 Additional sense length
8–11 Command specific information bytes
12–13 Additional Sense Code (ASC)
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
00 00 No additional sense - The flags in the sense data indicate the reason for the command
failure
00 01 Filemark detected - A Read or Space command terminated early due to an FM. The FM
flag is set.
00 02 EOM - A Write or Write File Marks command failed because the physical end of tape was
encountered, or a Read or Space command encountered EOM. The EOM flag is set.
00 04 BOM - A space command ended at Beginning of Tape. The EOM bit is also set.
00 05 EOD - Read or Space command terminated early because End of Data was encountered.
04 00 Cause not reportable - A cartridge is present in the drive, but it is in the process of being
unloaded.
04 01 Becoming Ready - A media access command was received during a front panel initiated
load or an immediate reported load command.
04 02 Initializing Command Required - A cartridge is present in the drive, but is not logically
loaded. A Load command is required.
04 03 Manual Intervention Required - A cartridge is present in the drive but could not be
loaded or unloaded without manual intervention.
0C 00 Write Error - A Write operation has failed. This is probably due to bad media, but may be
hardware related.
11 00 Unrecovered Read Error - A Read operation failed. This is probably due to bad media,
but may be hardware related.

Appendix D. Sense Data D-3

Table D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12–13 Additional Sense Code (ASC)
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
11 12 Auxiliary memory read error. The drive reported that it is unable to read the Auxiliary
Memory in a WORM cartridge.
14 00 Recorded Entity Not Found - A space or Locate command failed because a format
violation prevented the target from being found.
14 03 End Of Data not found - A Read type operation failed because a format violation related
to a missing EOD data set.
14 10 Not Ready - Auxiliary memory not accessible. The drive is not able to become ready
because it is unable to access the Auxiliary Memory in a WORM cartridge.
1A 00 Parameter list length error - The amount of parameter data sent is incorrect.
20 00 Invalid Command Operation Code - The Operation Code in the command was not a
valid Operation Code.
24 00 Invalid field in CDB - An invalid field has been detected in a Command Descriptor
Block.
25 00 LUN not supported - The command was addressed to a non-existent logical unit
number.
26 00 Invalid Field in Parameter List - An invalid field has been detected in the data sent
during the data phase.
27 00 Write Protect - A Write type operation has been requested on a cartridge which has been
write protected.
28 00 Not Ready to Ready Transition - A cartridge has been loaded successfully into the drive
and is now ready to be accessed.
29 00 Reset - The drive has powered on, received a reset signal or a bus device reset signal
since the initiator last accessed it.
2A 01 Mode Parameters Changed - The Mode parameters for the drive have been changed by
an initiator other than the one issuing the command.
30 00 Incompatible Media Installed - A write type operation could not be executed because it is
not supported on the cartridge type that is loaded.
30 01 Unknown Format - An operation could not be carried out because the cartridge in the
drive is of a format not supported by the drive.
30 02 Incompatible Format - An operation could not be completed because the Logical Format
is not correct.
30 03 Cleaning Cartridge Installed - An operation could not be carried out because the
cartridge in the drive is a cleaning cartridge.
30 07 Cleaning Failure - A cleaning operation was attempted, but could not be completed for
some reason.
30 0C Data Protect - WORM overwrite attempted. The drive rejected a write operation because
it would have resulted in an overwrite. Overwrite is not allowed on WORM media.
30 0D Medium Error - WORM integrity check. The drive rejected a Read or Write operation
because the cartridge is a suspicious WORM cartridge.
31 00 Media format corrupted - Data could not be read because the format on tape is not valid,
but is a known format. A failure occurred attempting to write the FID.
37 00 Rounded parameter - A Mode Select command parameter has been rounded because the
drive can not store it with the accuracy of the command.
3A 00 Media Not Present - A media access command has been received when there is no
cartridge loaded.
3B 00 Sequential Positioning Error - A command has failed and left the logical position at an
unexpected location.
3D 00 Invalid bits in identify Message - An illegal Identify Message has been received at the
drive at the start of a command.
3E 00 Logical Unit has not Self-Configured - The drive has just powered on and has not
completed its self test sequence and can not process commands.

D-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12–13 Additional Sense Code (ASC)
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
3F 01 Code Download - The firmware in the drive has just been changed by a Write Buffer
command.
40 xx Diagnostic failure - A diagnostic test has failed. The xx (ASCQ) is a vendor specific code
indicating the failing component.
43 00 Message Error - A message could not be sent or received due to excessive transmission
errors.
44 00 Internal target failure - A hardware failure has been detected in the drive that has caused
the command to fail.
45 00 Select/Reset Failure - An attempt to reselect an initiator in order to complete the
command has failed.
4B 00 Data Phase Error - A command could not be completed because too many parity errors
occurred during the Data phase.
4E 00 Overlapped Commands - An initiator selected the drive even though it already had a
command outstanding in the drive.
50 00 Write Append Error - A write type command failed because the point at which to
append data was unreadable.
51 00 Erase failure - An Erase command failed to erase the required area on the media.
52 00 Cartridge fault - A command could not be completed due to a fault in the tape cartridge.
53 00 Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 03) An attempt to load or eject the cartridge failed
due to a problem with the cartridge.
53 00 Media Load/Eject Failed - (Sense Key 04) An attempt to load or eject the cartridge failed
due to a problem with the drive.
53 02 Media Removal Prevented - An Unload command has failed to eject the cartridge
because media removal has been prevented.
5D 00 Failure Prediction Threshold - Failure Prediction thresholds have been exceeded
indicating that a failure may occur soon.
5D FF Failure Prediction False - A Mode Select command has been used to test for Failure
Prediction system.
82 82 Drive requires cleaning - The drive has detected that a cleaning operation is required to
maintain good operation.
82 83 Bad Code Detected - The data transferred to the drive during a firmware upgrade is
corrupt or incompatible with drive hardware.

Sense Key 0 (No Sense)

EE 13 Encryption - Key Translate
EF 13 Encryption - Key Translate EKM

Sense Key 3 (Medium Error)

30 02 Encryption - Encryption feature is not enabled so format/processing is not supported.
EE 60 Encryption - Proxy Command Error
EE D0 Encryption - Data Read Decryption Failure
EE D1 Encryption - Data Read after Write Decryption Failure
EE E0 Encryption - Key Translation Failure
EE E1 Encryption - Key Translation Ambiguous
EE F0 Encryption - Decryption Fenced (Read)
EE F1 Encryption - Encryption Fenced (Write)

Sense Key 4 (Hardware Error)

EE 0E Encryption - Key Service Timeout
EE 0F Encryption - Key Service Failure
40 00 Encryption - Failure Hardware, POST or Module Failure

Appendix D. Sense Data D-5

Table D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12–13 Additional Sense Code (ASC)
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ

Sense Key 5 (Illegal Request)

EE 00 Encryption - Key Service Not Enabled
EE 01 Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
EE 02 Encryption - Key Service Not Available
EE 10 Encryption - Key Required
EE 20 Encryption - Key Count Exceeded
EE 21 Encryption - Key Alias Exceeded
EE 22 Encryption - Key Reserved
EE 23 Encryption - Key Conflict
EE 24 Encryption - Key Method Change
EE 25 Encryption - Key Format Not Supported
EE 26 Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dAK
EE 27 Encryption - Unauthorized Request - dSK
EE 28 Encryption - Unauthorized Request - eAK
EE 29 Encryption - Authentication Failure
EE 2A Encryption - Invalid RDKi
EE 2B Encryption - Key Incorrect
EE 2C Encryption - Key Wrapping Failure
EE 2D Encryption - Sequencing Failure
EE 2E Encryption - Unsupported Type
EE 2F Encryption - New Key Encrypted Write Pending
EE 30 Encryption - Prohibited Request
EE 31 Encryption - Key Unknown
EE 32 Encryption - Keystore Related Problem
EE 42 Encryption - EKM Challenge Pending
EE E2 Encryption - Key Translation Disallowed
EE FF Encryption - Security Prohibited Function
EF 01 Encryption - Key Service Not Configured
26 11 Encryption - Incomplete Key - Associate Data Set
26 12 Encryption (T10) - Vendor Specific Reference Key Not Found
55 08 Encryption (T10) - Maximum Number of Supplemental Keys Exceeded

Sense Key 6 (Unit Attention)

EE 12 Encryption - Key Change Detected
EE 18 Encryption - Changed (Read)
EE 19 Encryption - Changed (Write)
EE 40 Encryption - EKM Identifier Changed
EE 41 Encryption - EKM Challenge Changed
EE 50 Encryption - Initiator Identifier Changed
EE 51 Encryption - Initiator Response Changed
2A 11 Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Another I_T Nexus
2A 12 Encryption - Data Encryption Parameters Changed by Vendor Specific Event

Sense Key 7 (Data Protect)

EF 10 Encryption - Key Required
EF 11 Encryption - Key Generation
EF 13 Encryption - Key Translate
EF 1A Encryption - Key Optional
EF C0 Encryption - No Operation
26 10 Encryption - Data Decryption Key Fail Limit

D-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
12–13 Additional Sense Code (ASC)
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Byte 12 Byte 13
ASC ASCQ
2A 13 Encryption - Data Encryption Key Instance Counter Changed
74 00 Security Error
74 01 Encryption - Unable to Decrypt Data
74 02 Encryption - Unencrypted Data Encountered While Decrypting
74 03 Encryption - Incorrect Data Encryption Key
74 04 Encryption - Cryptographic Integrity Validation Failed
74 05 Encryption - Error Decrypting Data
14 Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) ID
15 SKSV C/D Reserved BPV Bit pointer
(Bit pointer
valid)
16–17 SKSV =0: First Error Fault Symptom Code (FSC); SKSV = 1: Field Pointer
18–19 First Error Flag Data
20 Reserved (0)
21 CLN Reserved Reserved VolValid
22–28 Volume Label
29 Current Wrap
30–33 Relative LPOS
34 SCSI Address
35 Frame number Drive number
36–39 Port Identifier (Relative Target Port Address) Reporting Sense
This is the hashed SAS address of the drive port (for example, F32A94) with byte 36 being reserved.
40 Tape Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Relative Target Port Reporting Sense
Directory 0: Reserved
Valid 1: Relative Target Port 1 (Port 0)
2: Relative Target Port 2 (Port 1)
3: Relative Target Port 3 (Library Port)
41 Host Command (SCSI Opcode)
42 Density Type Media Type (Vendor Reserved)
0: No media present
1: Gen1 (384 track)
2: Gen2 (512 track)
3: Gen3 (704 track)
43–44 Volume Label Cartridge Type
45–48 Logical Block Number
(Current LBA that would be reported in Read Position command)
49–52 Data Set Number
53–54 1st Error FSC
55–56 1st Error Flag Data
57–58 2nd Error FSC
59–60 2nd Error Flag Data

Appendix D. Sense Data D-7

Table D-3. Ultrium Tape drive sense data (continued)
Bit Address or Name
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
61–62 Next-to-Last Error FSC
63–64 Next-to-Last Error Flag Data
65–66 Last Error FSC
67–68 Last Error Flag Data
69 LPOS Region
70–85 ERP Summary Information
86–89 Product Revision Label: YMDV
(As defined in Standard Inquiry; this is also known as the Code Level)
90–95 Reserved (0)

The descriptions below serve only as an overview of sense reporting in the tape drive.
This tape drive conforms to all sense field reporting as specified in the SCSI
standards.

Note:

1. The Error Code field (Byte 0) is set to 70h to indicate a current error, that is one
associated with the most recently received command. It is set to 71h to indicate
a deferred error which is not associated with the current command.
2. The segment number (Byte 1) is zero since the Copy, Compare, and Copy and
Verify commands are not supported.
3. The File Mark flag (Byte 2, bit 7) is set if a Space, Read, or Verify command did
not complete because a file mark was read.
4. The End of Media (EOM) flag (Byte 2, bit 6) is set if a Write or Write File Marks
command completed in the early warning area. Spacing into BOM also causes
this flag to be set. It is also set on an attempt to read or space past EOD, or if an
attempt is made to space into Beginning of Media.
5. The Illegal Length Indicator (ILI) flag (Byte 2, bit 5) is set if a Read or Verify
ended because a block was read from tape that did not have the block length
requested in the command.
6. The Information Bytes (Bytes 3-5) are only valid if the Valid flag is set. This
occurs only for current errors and not for deferred errors.
7. The Field Replaceable Unit field (Byte 14) is set to either zero or to a non-zero,
vendor-specific code indicating which part of the drive is suspected of causing
the failure.
8. The Clean (CLN) flag (Byte 21, bit 3) is set if the drive needs cleaning and clear
otherwise.
9. The Volume Label Fields Valid (VolValid) bit (Byte 21, bit 0) is set if the Volume
Label being reported is valid.
10.The Volume Label field (Bytes 22-28) reports the volume label if a cartridge is
loaded in the drive and Volume Label Fields Valid is set.
11.The Current Wrap field (Byte 29) reports the physical wrap of the tape. The least
significant bit reflects the current physical direction. A0h means that the current
direction is away from the physical beginning of the tape. A1h means that the
current direction is towards the physical beginning of the tape.
12.Relative LPOS fields (Bytes 30-33) reports the current physical position on the
tape.

D-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 13.SCSI Address field (Byte 34) reports the SCSI Bus Address for the drive. Values
returned range from 00h to 0Fh.
14.This field (Byte 35) contains the frame and drive number, passed across the
RS-422 serial interface.

For additional information, refer to the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI
Reference.

Appendix D. Sense Data D-9

D-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host

“Obtaining Error Information From an IBM™ System p” on page E-1

“Retrieving from a Sun System” on page E-5
“Retrieving from an HP-UX System” on page E-5
“Retrieving From an IBM System i™ with RISC Processor” on page E-5

How error information is obtained from the host depends on the type of device driver
being utilized. Table E-1 provides instructions specific to your type of device driver.

Table E-1. Device driver types

If you are… Then…
Using an IBM device Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guide
driver (GC27-2130) for problem determination information specific to your
host operating system. Visit ftp://ftp.software.ibm.com/storage/
devdrvr/Doc/ to download the latest version of the manual.
Using a non-IBM See “Using the IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool (ITDT)” on
device driver page 7-21. Visit
http://www-1.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S4000662 to
download the diagnostic tool.

Obtaining Error Information From an IBM™ System p

IBM device drivers for the System p operating system logs error information when an
error occurs on a tape drive or library.

The error information includes the following:

• Device VPD
• SCSI command parameters
• SCSI sense data (if available)

The AIX® Tape and Media Changer Device Driver for System p provides logging to
the system error log for a variety of errors. You can view the error log by following
this procedure.

1. At the AIX command line, type errpt |pg to display a summary report, or type
errpt -a |pg to display a detailed report. Press [Enter].

Note: In most cases you will use the summary report to find the date and time of any
errors related to library devices, then use the detail report to obtain the sense
data needed to identify the cause of the error.

2. Press [Enter] to scroll through the error log.

3. Type q and press [Enter], to quit the error log at any time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 E-1

 To correct a problem you noticed in the errpt report, determine the type of error by
using the examples that follow:
• For library errors [Resource Name = smcn (for example, smc0) and Resource Type
= 3572-TL]), see “SCSI Sense Data Definition” on page E-2 and the SCSI sense data
in “Library Sense Data” on page D-2.
• For drive errors [Resource Name = rmtn (for example, rmt0) and Resource Type =
LTO], see “SCSI Sense Data Definition” on page E-2 and locate the SCSI sense data
in “Tape Drive Sense Data” on page D-3.

SCSI Sense Data Definition

The following is an example of a tape drive communication failure while attached to
an Open Systems host through a SAS link, using SCSI protocol. When the host
detected the failure, it built the following SCSI Sense Data record. An explanation of
the SCSI Sense Data breakout in this example follows.

SENSE DATA
aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ....

0600 0000 1200 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0200 0300 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note: The bold area above represents the SCSI Sense Data presented by the host. The
regular font data (in this case many bytes of “zero”), designated by “ssss”
would normally contain device sense data, but with the kind of failure in this
example (COMMAND TIMEOUT), the host could not collect valid device
sense data, so zeros are the result and should be ignored. If the host had been
able to collect valid sense data from the drive, the first byte “ss” would be
“70”, “71”, “F0” or “F1”, and valid device sense data would be listed.

Detail Data

aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ....

aa Length of the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) sent by the host. In this case, “06” bytes.
bb SCSI target address. In this example, SCSI address “00”.
xx Unused or reserved.
cc Start of CDB, cc is the operation code (byte 0). In this case, “12” which was an “Inquiry”.

SCSI Sense Data – Library Error

The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from a System p Open
System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look like.
Unlike the previous situation with “SCSI Sense Data Definition”, this data contains
valid sense data as defined by the hex “70” in the first sense byte position. Therefore,
instead of all zeros as in the previous example, we have valid data to rely on. While
the data shows that this is a TAPE_ERR2, it could also be caused by a library failure.
The ASC/ASCQ points to a “Mechanical Positioning Error” while attempting a
“Move Medium” command (“A5”). For more information about Sense Data, refer to
the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.

E-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 LABEL: TAPE_ERR2
IDENTIFIER: 476B351D

Date/Time: Fri May 04 42:26 DFT

Sequence Number: 1665
Machine Id: 0046083B4C00
Node Id: risc4
Class: H
Type: PERM
Resource Name: smc0
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: 3572
Location: P1.1-I3/Q1-W5003013D38321011-L1000000000000
VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......3572-TL
Serial Number...............X2U78B0384
Device Specific.(FW)........4.09 (Firmware Level)

Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE

Failure Causes
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE

Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES

Detail Data

aabb xxxx ccdd eeee eeee eeee eeee eeee ffgg hhxx ssss ssss ssss ssss ssss ....

aa Length of the Command Descriptor Block (CDB) sent by the host. In this case, “0C” bytes.
bb SCSI target address. In this example, SCSI address “00”.
xx Unused or reserved.
cc Start of CDB, cc is the operation code (byte 0). In this case, “A5” which was an “Move Medium”.

SENSE DATA
0C00 0000 A500 0000 100F 1010 0000 0000 0102 0000 7000 0400 0000 000A 0000 0000
818F 0000 BE00 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Table E-2. Library sense data example

Hex Description
A5 SCSI Command (in this case Move Medium).
70 Byte 0 of Library Sense Data (Valid Data).
04 Sense Key (in this case Hardware Error).
818F ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code qualifier), in this case a “Cannot
Find Slider Block” error.

Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host E-3

 SCSI Sense Data – Tape Drive Error
The following example of SCSI Sense Data was received from a System p Open
System host and shows a Tape Drive Failure and what the sense data would look like.
Like the SCSI sense data in the previous example, this data contains valid sense data
as defined by the hex “71” in the first sense byte position. Therefore, we have valid
data to rely on. While the data shows that this is a TAPE_ERR2, further review of the
ASC/ASCQ (Media Load or Eject Failed) points more to a problem with the media or
the drive. The fact that a FID was listed (“86”) defines the failure as “The drive
detected a drive hardware or media fault”. In this case, the FID should be followed to
make a repair. For more information about Sense Key and ASC/ASCQ fields, refer to
the IBM TotalStorage LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference.

LABEL: TAPE_ERR2
IDENTIFIER: 476B351D

Date/Time: Wed May 09 07:51:42 DFT

Sequence Number: 1669
Machine Id: 0046083B4C00
Node Id: risc4
Class: H
Type: PERM
Resource Name: rmt0
Resource Class: tape
Resource Type: LTO
Location: P1.1-I3/Q1-W5003013D38321011-L0

VPD:
Manufacturer................IBM
Machine Type and Model......ULT3573-TD4
Serial Number...............1300000680
Device Specific.(FW)........74H4 (Firmware Level)
Loadable Microcode Level....A1700D5C

Description
TAPE DRIVE FAILURE

Probable Causes
TAPE DRIVE

Failure Causes
TAPE
TAPE DRIVE

Recommended Actions
PERFORM PROBLEM DETERMINATION PROCEDURES

Detail Data
SENSE DATA
0600 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0102 0000 7100 0400 0000 0058 0000 0000
5300 8602 8E07 0000 0001 0110 0001 0000 0000 0000 0200 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 2800 01E0 0000 0000 0000 4133 3820
2020 2000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 8000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

E-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Table E-3. Drive sense data example
Hex Description
71 Byte 0 of Library Sense Data (Valid Data).
04 Sense Key (in this case Hardware Error).
5300 ASC/ASCQ (additional sense code/additional sense code qualifier).
86 FID (FRU identification number). In this case, a Drive Hardware or Media problem.

Retrieving from a Sun System

The Sun System provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or library
in system-errolog /var/adm/messages. When you have located the error information,
go to Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.

Retrieving from an HP-UX System

The HP-UX system provides information when an error occurs on a tape drive or
library in syslog /var/adm/syslog.log. When you have located the error information,
go to Chapter 6, “Troubleshooting,” on page 6-1.

Retrieving From an IBM System i™ with RISC Processor

IBM device drivers for the System i operating system logs error information when an
error occurs on a tape drive or library.

The error information includes the following:

• Device VPD
• SCSI command parameters
• SCSI sense data (if available)

To gain access to the System i problem logs and error logs, sign on at any available
workstation using the QSRV logon and its security password (QSRV). After signing
on, the proper access authorizations will be granted and the System i MAIN MENU
displays.
1. Type STRSST (Start System Service Tools) command on the command entry line
on the System i Main Menu, and press Enter.
2. On the “System Service Tool (SST)” screen, select Start a service tool, and press
Enter.
3. On the “Start a Service Tool” screen, select Product activity log, and press Enter.
4. On the “Product activity log” screen, select Analyze log, and press Enter.
5. On the “Select Subsystem Data” screen, select Magnetic media, enter the From
and To time period for searching the error log, and press Enter.
6. On the “Select Analysis Report Options” screen, select the following, and press
Enter.
a. Report type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
b. Optional entries to include
1) Informational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES
2) Statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO
c. Reference code selection
1) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Appendix E. Message Retrieval at the Host E-5

 2) Reference codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *ALL
d. Device selection
1) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2) Device type or resource names . . . *ALL
7. On the “Log Analysis Report” screen, enter a 5 on an error line that has a
resource type of 3572, and press Enter.
8. On the “Display Detail Report for Resource” screen, press:
• F4=Additional Information.
Pressing F4 will display the machine type and serial number of the device. It
also will display SCSI sense data, if available.
• F6=Hexadecimal report.
Pressing F6 will display the device hexadecimal data (for support use).
• F9=Address Information.
Pressing F9 will display the SCSI address information.

E-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Appendix F. Library Configuration Form
Make a copy of this form, fill it out as you are installing and configuring your library.
Update the form each time changes are made to the library. The information on this
form is very important. Having the information on this form will be helpful if a call to
IBM Service is necessary. Store this form in a secure location.

Physical Library

Machine type 3572-TL

Serial Number
Library Name
Auto Cleaning
Bar code label length

Logical Library

Library Access Mode

Loop
Autoload
Active Slots

Tape Drive

Serial Number
Worldwide Node Name

Network Settings

Ethernet Link Speed

SSL Security
IPv4
DHCP
Static IP Address
Subnet Mask Address
Gateway Address
IPv6
DHCP
Stateless Auto Configuration
Static IP Address

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 F-1

 Prefix Length
Gateway
DNS
DNS IP Address
NTP Date/Time Server
NTP Server IP Address
Time Zone
Auto Adjustment by PC
SMTP (Mail) Server
SMTP Server Address
Sender Address
Subject
Mail to 01
Mail to 02
Mail to 03
Mail to 04
Mail Event Level
SNMP Server
Community
Name
Location
Contact
Trap to 01
Trap to 02
Trap to 03
Trap to 04
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
Trap Event Level

Encryption Settings (S4H only)

Encryption License Key

Encryption Method
Encryption Policy
SSL Security
Primary EKM Server IP Address
Primary EKM TCP Port Address
Primary EKM SSL Port Address
Secondary EKM IP Address
Secondary EKM TCP Port Address

F-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Secondary EKM SSL Port Address
Advanced Encryption Settings

Library and Drive Firmware

Type of Firmware Current Firmware Level

Library
Drive

Users Accounts
The Administrator (admin) password is listed in the table below. Modify and add
additional Administrator, Superuser and User names and passwords that are created.

User name Access Level Password

admin Administrator secure

My Notification

User name
Password

Appendix F. Library Configuration Form F-3

F-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Accessibility

Keyboard Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted
mobility or limited vision, to use the HTML version of the customer documentation
successfully.

Features
These are the major accessibility features for the HTML version of the IBM System
Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide:
• You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what is
displayed on the screen. The following screen readers have been tested: WebKing
and Window-Eyes.
• You can operate all features using the keyboard instead of the mouse.

Navigating by keyboard
You can use keys or key combinations to perform operations and initiate many menu
actions that can also be done through mouse actions. You can navigate the HTML
version of the IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service
Guide help system from the keyboard by using the following key combinations:
• To traverse to the next link, button, or topic, press Tab inside a frame (page).
• To move to the previous topic node, press ^ or Shift+Tab.
• To scroll all the way up or down, press Home or End, respectively.
• To print the current page or active frame, press Ctrl+P.
• To select, press Enter.

Accessing the publications

You can view the publications for this library in Adobe Portable Document Format
(PDF) using the Adobe Acrobat Reader. The PDFs are provided at the following Web
site:

http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 G-1

G-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. IBM
may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other
countries (or regions). Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be
used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country (or region) where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (or regions) do not allow disclaimer of express
or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication
at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM web sites are provided for convenience
only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those web sites. The
materials at those web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use
of those web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those
products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM
has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance,
compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the
capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those
products.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 H-1

 The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the
United States, or other countries (or regions), or both:
AIX System p
AS/400 System x
IBM System z
iSeries System Storage
i5/OS Tivoli
OS/400 TotalStorage
pSeries xSeries
RS/6000 zSeries
System i

The following are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company, International Business

Machines Corporation, and Certance:
Linear Tape-Open
LTO
Ultrium

Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States, or other

countries (or regions), or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, and the Windows logo are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, or other
countries (or regions), or both.

Solaris and Sun are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Incorporated.

Unix is a trademark of The Open Group in the United States, or other countries or
regions, or both.

Other company, product, or service names may be the trademarks or service marks of
others.

Electronic Emission Notices

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A

Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by

unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

H-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive [select either 89/336/EEC as amended by Council Directive 93/68/EEC or
select 2004/108/EC as appropriate] on the approximation of the laws of the Member
States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for
any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The
limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

European Community contact:

IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Tele: 0049 (0)711 785 1176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
e-mail: tjahn@de.ibm.com

People’s Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission

Statement

Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Notices H-3
 IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact:
IBM Taiwan Corporation
3-4F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei, Taiwan
Tel:0800-016-888

Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen

Verträglichkeit. Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der
EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU- Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die
Grenzwerte der EN 550022 Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu

installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM empfohlene
Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die
Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der IBM
verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

“Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen.”

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische

Verträglichkeit von Geräten. Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG)”. Dies is die Umsetzung der
EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

H-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

 Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG
Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A.

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland
GmbH 70548 Stuttgart.

Generelle Informationen:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.

Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Notices H-5
H-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms, AME. Application Managed Encryption.
abbreviations, and acronyms that are used in this
ampere (A). A unit of measure for electric current that
publication. If you do not find the term you are
is equivalent to a flow of one coulomb per second, or to
looking for, refer to the index or to the Dictionary of
the current produced by one volt applied across a
Computing, 1994. resistance of one ohm.

ANSI. American National Standards Institute.

Numbers
application-managed encryption. Tape encryption
2:1 compression. The relationship between the quantity controlled by an application.
of data that can be stored with compression as compared
archive. To collect and store files in a designated place.
to the quantity of data that can be stored without
compression. In 2:1 compression, twice as much data can ASCII. American National Standard Code for
be stored with compression as can be stored without Information Interchange. A 7 bit coded character set (8
compression. bits including parity check) that consists of control
characters and graphic characters.
A assigning a device. The establishing of the relationship
of a device to a running task, process, job, or program.
A. Ampere.
assignment. The naming of a specific device to
ac. Alternating current. perform a function.

access method. A technique for moving data between asynchronous. Pertaining to two or more processes
main storage and input or output devices. that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific
events such as common timing signals.
accessor. This component contains the library robot
and bar code reader. The accessor moves cartridges to attention (notice). A word for calling attention to the
and from the I/O Station, storage slots, and tape drives. possibility of danger to a program, device, or system, or
to data. Contrast with caution and danger.
adapter card. A circuit board that adds function to a
computer. ATTN. Attention.

adj. Adjustment.
B
AH. Authentication Header. This is an Internet
Protocol intended to guarantee connectionless integrity
backup. To make additional copies of documents or
and data origin authentication of IP datagrams. Further,
software for safekeeping.
it can optionally protect against replay attacks by using
the sliding window technique and discarding old bar code. A code representing characters by sets of
packets. parallel bars of varying thickness and separation which
are read optically by transverse scanning.
AIX. Advanced Interactive Executive. IBM’s
implementation of the UNIX® operating system. The bar code label. Paper bearing a bar code and having an
RS/6000 system, among others, uses AIX as it’s adhesive backing. The bar code label must be affixed to a
operating system. tape cartridge to enable the library to identify the
cartridge and its volume serial number.
alphanumeric. Pertaining to a character set that
contains letters, numerals, and usually other characters, bar code reader. A laser device specialized for
such as punctuation marks. scanning and reading bar codes and converting them
into either the ASCII or EBCDIC digital character code.
alter. To change.
bezel. Decorative and safety cover.
ambient temperature. The temperature of air or other
media in a designated area, particularly the area bicolored. Having two colors.
surrounding equipment.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2008 I-1

bit. Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary char. Character.
numbering system.
CHK. Check.
BOM or bill of materials. A list of specific types and
amounts of direct materials expected to be used to cleaning cartridge. A tape cartridge that is used to
produce a given job or quantity of output. clean the heads of a tape drive. Contrast with data
cartridge.
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). BGP is the core
routing protocol of the Internet. It works by maintaining command. A control signal that initiates an action or
a table of IP networks or ’prefixes’ that designate the start of a sequence of actions.
network reachability among autonomous systems (AS).
compact disc (CD). A disc, usually 4.75 inches in
browser. A client program that initiates requests to a diameter, from which data is read optically by means of
Web server and displays the information that the server a laser.
returns.
compression. The process of eliminating gaps, empty
buffer. A routine or storage used to compensate for a fields, redundancies, and unnecessary data to shorten
difference in rate of flow of data or time of occurrence of the length of records or blocks.
events, when transferring data from one device to
another. concurrent. Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be
run on one control unit while the rest of the subsystem
bus. A facility for transferring data between several remains available for customer applications.
devices located between two end points, only one device
being able to transmit at a given moment. contingent connection. A connection between a
channel path and a drive caused when a unit check
byte. A string consisting of a certain number of bits occurs during an I/O operation.
(usually 8) that are treated as a unit and represent a
character. A fundamental data unit. controller. A device that provides the interface
between a system and one or more tape drives.

C control path drive. A drive that communicates

messages from the host computer to the library in which
the drive is installed.
CA certification. In cryptography, a certificate from a
Certificate Authority (CA). cookie. A packet of data exchanged between the
library and a web browser to track configuration.
capacity. The amount of data that can be contained on
storage media and expressed in bytes of data. CP. Circuit protector.

cartridge manual rewind tool. A device that can be CRU. Customer replaceable unit.
fitted into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind tape
into or out of the cartridge. ctrl. Control.

cartridge memory (CM). Within each data cartridge, CU. Control unit.
an embedded electronics and interface module that can
store and retrieve a cartridge’s historical usage and other
information. D
cartridge storage slot. Individual slot located within a danger (notice). A word to call attention to possible
magazine that is used to house tape cartridges. lethal harm to people. Contrast with attention and
caution.
caution (notice). A word to call attention to possible
personal harm to people. Contrast with attention and data. Any representations such as characters or analog
danger. quantities to which meaning is or might be assigned.
CE. Customer engineer; field engineer; service data buffer. The storage buffer in the control unit. This
representative. buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate between
the control unit and the channel.
centimeter (cm). One one-hundredth of a meter (0.01
m). Approximately 0.39 inch. data cartridge. A tape cartridge dedicated to storing
data. Contrast with cleaning cartridge.
channel command. An instruction that directs a data
channel, control unit, or device to perform an operation
or set of operations.

I-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

data check. A synchronous or asynchronous indication download. (1) To transfer programs or data from a
of a condition caused by invalid data or incorrect computer to a connected device, typically a personal
positioning of data. computer. (2) To transfer data from a computer to a
connected device, such as a workstation or
dc. Direct current. microcomputer.
DCS. Designated Cleaning Slot DRAM. Dynamic random-access memory.
degauss. To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by drive, magnetic tape. A mechanism for moving
means of electrical coils carrying currents that neutralize magnetic tape and controlling its movement.
the magnetism of the tape.
Drive Not Configured. This message occurs during
degausser. A device that makes magnetic tape the first boot after a factory settings restore is executed.
nonmagnetic. This is not a real issue since it takes the library a while to
configure.
degradation. A decrease in quality of output or
throughput or an increase in machine error rate. DRV. Drive.
degraded. Decreased in quality of output or DSA key. Encryption key type.
throughput or increased machine error rate.
DSE. Data security erase.
deserialize. To change from serial-by-bit to
parallel-by-byte. DSP. Digital signal processor.

detented. A part being held in position with a catch or

lever. E
device. Any hardware component or peripheral, such
as a tape drive or tape library, that can receive and send EBCDIC. Extended binary-coded decimal interchange
data. code.

device driver. A file that contains the code needed to EC. Edge connector. Engineering change.
use an attached device.
ECC. Error correction code.
DHCPv6. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
EEPROM. Electrically erasable programmable
for IPv6. Although IPv6’s stateless address
read-only memory.
autoconfiguration removes the primary motivation for
DHCP in IPv4, DHCPv6 can still be used to statefully EIA. Electronics Industries Association.
assign addresses if the network administrator desires
more control over addressing. EIA unit. A unit of measure, established by the
Electronic Industries Association, equal to 44.45
DH group. Diffie-Hellman group. millimeters (1.75 inches).
DIAG. Diagnostic section of maintenance information eject. To remove or force out from within.
manual.
EKM. See encryption key manager.
differential. See High Voltage Differential (HVD).
electronic mail. Correspondence in the form of
direct access storage. A storage device in which the messages transmitted between user terminals over a
access time is independent of the location of the data. computer network.
display contrast. The brightness of the display on the e-mail. See electronic mail.
Operator Panel.
encryption. A method of storing data in a format that
DLL. Dynamic Link Library. Microsoft’s helps protect data from inadvertent or deliberate
implementation of the shared library concept. These compromise. An encryption-enabled drive contains the
libraries usually have the file extension dll, ocs (for necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and
libraries containing activeX controls, or drv (for legacy decrypt host tape application data. Encryption policy
system drivers). and encryption keys are provided by the host
application or host server.
DNS. Directory Name System. This allows the library
to recognize text-based addresses instead of numeric IP
addresses.

Glossary I-3
encryption key manager (EKM). A Java software file transfer protocol (FTP). In the Internet suite of
program that assists IBM-encrypting tape drives in protocols, an application layer protocol that uses TCP
generating, protecting, storing, and maintaining and Telnet services to transfer bulk-data files between
encryption keys that encrypt information written to and machines or hosts.
decrypt information read from tape media.
firmware. Proprietary code that is usually delivered as
entitlement. IBM entitlement is the official right to microcode as part of an operating system. Firmware is
receive service and support for your tape library. more efficient than software loaded from an alterable
medium and more adaptable to change than pure
EPO. Emergency power off. hardware circuitry. An example of firmware is the Basic
Input/Output System (BIOS) in read-only memory
EPROM. Erasable programmable read only memory. (ROM) on a PC motherboard.
EQC. Equipment check. FLASH EEPROM. An electrically erasable
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) that can
equipment check. An asynchronous indication of a
be updated.
malfunction.
FMR. Field microcode replacement.
Error log. A dataset or file in a product or system
where error information is stored for later access. format. The arrangement or layout of data on a data
medium.
ESD. Electrostatic discharge.
formatter. Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that
ESP. Encapsulating Security Payload. This is an
performs data conversion, speed matching, encoding,
Internet Protocol that provides origin authenticity,
first level error recovery, and interfaces to one or more
integrity, and confidentiality protection of a packet. ESP
tape drives.
also supports encryption-only and authentication-only
configurations, but using encryption without FP. File protect.
authentication is strongly discouraged because it is
insecure. frayed. Damaged as if by an abrasive substance.

FRU. Field replaceable unit.

F
FSC. Fault symptom code.
fault symptom code (FSC). A hexadecimal code FSI. Fault symptom index.
generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in
response to a detected subsystem error. FTSS. Field Technical Sales Support.
FC. Feature code. functional microcode. Microcode that is resident in the
machine during normal customer operation.
FCC. Federal communications commission.

FE. Field engineer, customer engineer, or service

representative.
G
fiducial. A target used for teaching a physical location g. Gram.
to a robot.
GB. gigabyte.
field replaceable unit (FRU). An assembly that is
replaced in its entirety when any one of its components GBIC. Gigabit Interface Converter.
fails.
Gbs. gigabits/second
file. A named set of records stored or processed as a
unit. Also referred to as a dataset. gigabit (Gbit). 1 000 000 000 bits.

file protection. The processes and procedures gigabyte (GB). 1 000 000 000 bytes.
established in an information system that are designed
Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC). Converts copper
to inhibit unauthorized access to, contamination of, or
interface to optic interface.
deletion of a file.
gnd. Ground.

I-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

H INST. Installation.

interface. A shared boundary. An interface might be a

HD Slot Technology. High-density (HD) slot hardware component to link two devices or it might be a
technology. Allows multiple cartridges to be stored portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more
in a tiered architecture. computer programs.

hertz (Hz). Unit of frequency. One hertz equals one Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4). See IPv4.
cycle per second.
Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6). See IPv6.
hex. Hexadecimal.
interposer. The part used to convert a 68-pin connector
High Voltage Differential (HVD). A logic signaling to a 50-pin D-shell connector.
system that enables data communication between a
supported host and the library. HVD signaling uses a intervention required. Manual action is needed.
paired plus and minus signal level to reduce the effects
of noise on the SCSI bus. Any noise injected into the INTRO. Introduction.
signal is present in both a plus and minus state, and is
I/O. Input/output.
thereby canceled. Synonymous with differential.
I/O Station. Cartridge location dedicated for the
HVD. SCSI Bus High Voltage Differential
insertion of cartridges into and the removal of cartridges
Hz. Hertz (cycles per second). from the library.

IOP. Input/output processor.

I IP. Internet protocol

IBM Ultrium Tape Drive. Located within the library, a IP address. An identifier for a computer or device on a
data-storage device that controls the movement of the TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol
magnetic tape in an IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge. route messages based on the IP address of the
The drive houses the mechanism (drive head) that reads destination. See IPv4 and IPv6.
and writes data to the tape.
IPL. Initial program load.
ID. Identifier.
IPsec (IP security). A set of protocols for securing IPv6
identifier (ID). (1) In programming languages, a network communications by authentication and
lexical unit that names a language object; for example, encryption.
the names of variables, arrays, records, labels, or
procedures. An identifier usually consists of a letter IP Stack. A TCP/IP protocol stack that manages static
optionally followed by letters, digits, or other characters. IP addresses.
(2) One or more characters used to identify or name data
IPv4. A network layer protocol for packet-switched
element and possibly to indicate certain properties of
networks. IPv4 supports 232 (about 4.3 billion)
that data element. (3) A sequence of bits or characters
addresses.
that identifies a program, device, or system to another
program, device, or system. IPv6. A network layer protocol for packet-switched
networks. It is the designated successor of IPv4 for
IKE. Internet Key Exchange used in the IPsec protocol.
general use on the Internet. The main improvement
IML. Initial microprogram load. brought by IPv6 is the increase in the number of
addresses available for networked devices, allowing, for
incompatible magazine. This message may appear on example, each mobile phone and mobile electronic
the Operator Panel during library initialization. It occurs device to have its own unique address.
during factory restore or VPD. This is not a real issue
since it takes the library a while to configure. ISV. Independent Software Vendor.

initial microprogram load (IML). The action of ITDT. IBM TotalStorage Diagnostic Tool.
loading a microprogram from an external storage to
ITST. Idle-time self-test.
writable control storage.

initiator. The component that executes a command.

The initiator can be the host system or the tape control
unit.

Glossary I-5
K M
kilogram (kg). One thousand grams (approximately MAC address. The Media Access Control address of a
2.2 pounds). computer networking device.

km. kilometer. 1000 Meters, Approximately 5/8 mile. magnetic tape. A tape with a magnetic surface layer on
which data can be stored by magnetic recording.

L MAP. Maintenance analysis procedure.

mask. A pattern of characters that controls the

LAN. Local area network. A computer network within retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
a limited area. characters. To use a pattern of characters to control the
retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
LCD. See liquid crystal display.
characters.
LDAP. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. This
master file. A file used as an authority in a given job
allows the library to use login and password information
and that is relatively permanent, even though its
stored on a server to grant access to the library
contents may change. Synonymous with main file.
functionality.
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU). The size of the
LDI. Library Drive Interface.
largest packet that a network protocol can transmit.
LED. Light-emitting diode.
MB. Mega Byte (usually expressed as data rate in
library certification. In cryptography, a certificate MB/s or MB/second).
provided by the library.
media capacity. The amount of data that can be
library-managed encryption. Tape encryption contained on a storage medium, expressed in bytes of
controlled by the tape library. data.

library recovery. Library firmware function that media-type identifier. Part of the bar code on an IBM
generally retries failed operations up to three times Ultrium Tape Cartridge that identifies the type of
before posting a failure or, in some situations, cartridge (for example “L1”). “L” identifies cartridges
proceeding with an operation that can be completed in that can be read by devices that incorporate LTO
an alternative manner. technology. The numeral indicates the generation of the
type.
Linear Tape-Open (LTO). A type of tape storage
technology developed by the IBM Corporation, mega. One million of.
Hewlett-Packard, and Certance. LTO is an “open
meter. In the Metric System, the basic unit of length;
format” technology, which means that its users will have
equal to approximately 39.37 inches.
multiple sources of product and media. The “open”
nature of LTO technology enables compatibility between MIB. Management Information Base. Information
different vendors’ offerings by ensuring that vendors repository used by SNMP.
comply with verification standards. The LTO technology
is implemented in two formats: the Accelis format micro. One millionth of.
focuses on fast access; the Ultrium format focuses on
high capacity. The Ultrium format is the preferred format microcode. (1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A
when capacity is the key storage consideration. Ultrium code, representing the instructions of an instruction set,
tape cartridges have a capacity of up to 800 GB (1600 GB implemented in a part of storage that is not
with 2:1 hardware compression). program-addressable. (3) To design, write, and test one
or more micro instructions. (4) See also microprogram.
liquid crystal display (LCD). A low-power display
technology used in computers and other I/O devices. microdiagnostic routine. A program that runs under
the control of a supervisor, usually to identify field
loadable. Having the ability to be loaded. replaceable units.
LME. Library Managed Encryption. microdiagnostic utility. A program that is run by the
customer engineer to test the machine.
LTO. See Linear Tape-Open.
microinstruction. A basic or elementary machine
LVD. SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential. instruction.

I-6 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

microprogram. A group of microinstructions that online. Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit
when executed performs a preplanned function. The that is under the continual control of a computer.
term microprogram represents a dynamic arrangement Contrast with offline.
or selection of one or more groups of microinstructions
for execution to perform a particular function. The term OPER. Operation.
microcode represents microinstructions used in a
product as an alternative to hard-wired circuitry to ov. Over voltage.
implement certain functions of a processor or other
overrun. Loss of data because a receiving device is
system component.
unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted.
MIM. Media information message.
overtightening. To tighten too much.
mm. Millimeter.

modifier. That which changes the meaning. P

mount a device. To assign an I/O device with a request parameter. A variable that is given a constant value for
to the operator. a specified application and that may denote the
application.
MP. Microprocessor.
p bit. Parity bit.
ms. Millisecond.
PC. Parity check.
MSG. Message.
PCC. Power control compartment.
multipath. Pertaining to using more than one path.
PDF. Portable Document Format.
N PE. Parity error. Product engineer.

N/A. Not applicable. PFS. Perfect forward secrecy.

Network Address Translation (NAT). NAT involves pick. Pertaining to the library, to remove, by means of
rewriting the source and/or destination addresses of IP a robotic device, a tape cartridge from a storage slot or
packets as they pass through a router or firewall. Most drive.
systems using NAT do so in order to enable multiple
picker. A robotic mechanism located inside the library
hosts on a private network to access the Internet using a
that moves cartridges between the cartridge storage slots
single public IP address.
and the drive. See accessor.
node. In a network, a point at which one or more
PM. Preventive maintenance.
functional units connect channels or data circuits.
POR. Power-on reset.
NTP. Network Time Protocol. This allows the library to
set its internal date and time based on the date and time port. A physical connection for communication
of a sever. between the 3590 and the host processor. The 3590 has
two SCSI ports.
NVS. Nonvolatile storage. A storage device whose
contents are not lost when power is cut off. Portable Document Format (PDF). A standard
specified by Adobe Systems, Incorporated, for the
electronic distribution of documents. PDF files are
O compact, can be distributed globally (via e-mail, the
Web, intranets, or CD-ROM), and can be viewed with the
oersted. The unit of magnetic field strength in the Acrobat Reader, which is software from Adobe Systems
centimeter-gram-second (cgs) electromagnetic system. that can be downloaded at no cost from the Adobe
The oersted is the magnetic field strength in the interior Systems home page.
of an elongated, uniformly wound solenoid that is
excited with a linear current density in its winding of Private key. A cryptographic key used to decrypt a
one abampere per 4π centimeters of axial length. message.

offline. Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit PROM. Programmable read only memory.
without the continual control of a computer. Contrast
with online. PS. Power supply.

Glossary I-7
PTF. Program temporary fix. A single bugfix or group
of bugfixes distributed in a form ready to install for
S
customers.
s. Seconds of time.
PWR. Power.
SAC. Service Action Code. Code developed to indicate
possible FRU or FRUs to replace to repair the hardware.
R
SAS. See Serial Attached SCSI.
rack. A unit that houses the components of a storage scratch cartridge. A data cartridge that contains no
subsystem, such as the library. useful data, but can be written to with new data.

rackmount kit. A packaged collection of articles used SCSI. Small computer system interface.
to install the rack mounted version of the library.
SE. Single-ended.
RAM. Random access memory.
segment. A part.
random access memory. A storage device into which
data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a sel. Select.
nonsequential manner.
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS). A drive with a SAS
RAS. Reliability, availability, and serviceability. interface can be linked directly to controllers. SAS is a
performance improvement over traditional SCSI because
record. A collection of related data or words, treated as SAS enables multiple devices (up to 128) of different
a unit. sizes and types to be connected simultaneously with
thinner and longer cables. It supports full-duplex signal
recording density. The number of bits in a single linear transmission up to 3 Gb/s. In addition, SAS drives can
track measured per unit of length of the recording be hot-plugged.
medium.
serialize. To change from parallel-by-byte to
recoverable error. An error condition that allows serial-by-bit.
continued execution of a program.
serializer. A device that converts a space distribution
ref. Reference. of simultaneous states representing data into a
corresponding time sequence of states.
reg. Register.
servo, servos. An adjective for use in qualifying some
reinventory. To inventory again.
part or aspect of a servomechanism.
retension. The process or function of tightening the
servomechanism. A feedback control system in which
tape onto the cartridge, if it is sensed that the tape has a
at least one of the system signals represents mechanical
loose wrap on the cartridge.
motion.
RFC (Request for Comments). Request for Comments
signature. A digital signature used in cryptography to
(RFC) documents are a series of memoranda
identify one party to ensure authenticity.
encompassing new research, innovations, and
methodologies applicable to Internet technologies. slot blocker. A slot blocker is used to restrict/close off
a data cell so a data cartridge cannot be inserted.
RH. Relative humidity.
Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI). A
RML. Rack Mount Line.
standard used by computer manufacturers for attaching
robot. Accessor. peripheral devices (such as tape drives, hard disks,
CD-ROM players, printers, and scanners) to computers
robotics. Accessor assembly. (servers). Pronounced “scuzzy”. Variations of the SCSI
interface provide for faster data transmission rates than
root CA certification. In cryptography, a root standard serial and parallel ports (up to 160 megabytes
certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA). per second). The variations include:

RPQ. Request for price quotation. • Fast/Wide SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus, and supports data
rates of up to 20 MBps.
RSA key. Encryption key type.
• SCSI-1: Uses an 8-bit bus, and supports data rates of 4
R/W. Read/write. MBps.

I-8 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

• SCSI-2: Same as SCSI-1, but uses a 50-pin connector
instead of a 25-pin connector, and supports multiple
T
devices.
• Ultra SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus, and supports data tachometer, tach. A device that emits pulses that are
rates of 20 or 40 MBps. used to measure/check speed or distance.
• Ultra2 SCSI: Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus and supports tape cartridge. A container holding magnetic tape that
data rates of 40 or 80 MBps. can be processed without separating it from the
• Ultra3 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates container.
of 80 or 160 MBps.
• Ultra160 SCSI: Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data tape void. An area in the tape in which no signal can be
rates of 80 or 160 MBps. detected.

SME. System Managed Encryption. TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet

Protocol.
SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol. Used
by network management systems to monitor TCU. Tape control unit.
network-attached devices.
TH. Thermal.
SNS. Sense.
thread/load operation. A procedure that places tape
SNTP. Simple Network Time Protocol. Used to along the tape path.
synchronize the clocks of network-attached devices.
TM. Tapemark.
special feature. A feature that can be ordered to
transport mode. End-to-end communications security
enhance the capability, storage capacity, or performance
in which the end-point computers do the security
of a product, but is not essential for its basic work.
processing.
SPI. Security Parameters Index.
trusted certification. In cryptography, a trustworthy
SR. Service representative, see also CE. certificate not registered with a Certificate Authority.

SRAM. Static random access memory. tunnel mode. Port-to-port communications security in
which security is provided to several machines by a
SS. Status store. single node.

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer). A set of cryptographic

protocols for secure communications on the Internet for U
such things as web browsing, e-mail, Internet faxing,
instant messaging, and other data transfer. SSL allows UART. Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter.
applications to communicate across a network in a way
designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering, and unload. Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from
message forgery. the drive.

ST. Store. utilities. Utility programs.

standard feature. The significant design elements of a utility programs. A computer program in general
product that are included as part of the fundamental support of the processes of a computer; for instance, a
product. diagnostic program.

START. Start maintenance. uv. Under voltage.

subsystem. A secondary or subordinate system,

usually capable of operating independently of, or V
asynchronously with, a controlling system.

SUPP. Support. VOLSER. Volume serial number.

sync. Synchronous, synchronize. Occurring with a volume. A certain portion of data, together with its
regular or predictable time relationship. data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a unit.

system-managed encryption. Tape encryption is set up

implicitly through the IBM device driver.

Glossary I-9
VPD. Vital product data. The information contained
within the tape drive that requires nonvolatile storage
used by functional areas of the drive, and information
required for manufacturing, RAS, and engineering.

W
word. A character string that is convenient for some
purpose to consider as an entity.

World Wide Node Name (WWNN). A unique

character string identifying Fiber Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBA)

Write. Write command.

WT. world trade.

X
XR. External register.

XRA. External register address register.

I-10 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Index

A CE log, dumping 4-33

changing passwords
D
access mode, library Operator Panel 4-11 data cartridges 1-8, 5-2
configuration 3-18 Web User Interface 4-20 date settings
Accessor A-9 channel calibration 1-7 configuration 3-21, 3-31, 4-26
viewing statistics 4-35 Clean Drive LED 2-2 Operator Panel 4-9
Accessor locking screw 1-5 cleaning cartridge 5-4 default settings
removing 3-12 cleaning cartridges 1-8 Operator Panel 4-11
account types, Web User Interface 2-6, cleaning drives depth of library 1-9
A-2 Operator Panel 4-5 deskside cover 3-2
active slots Web User Interface 4-18 desktop mounting
configuration 3-19, 3-30 clock, Operator Panel 2-1 installation 3-2
Operator Panel 4-8 configuration 3-14 device drivers, supported 1-11
Web User Interface 4-22 active slots 3-19, 3-30 DHCP 3-20, 4-23
application managed encryption application managed encryption 3-23 Operator Panel 4-10, 4-11
configuration 3-23 auto cleaning 3-19, 3-31 diagnosing problems 6-3
Web User Interface 4-24 cartridge assignment 3-19 diagnostics
Attention LED 2-2 date settings 3-21, 3-31, 4-26 Operator Panel 4-12, 4-13
auto cleaning default settings 3-15 verifying library 3-32
configuration 3-19, 3-31 DNS server IP address 3-21, 4-23 dimensions of library 1-9
Operator Panel 4-8 encryption 3-22 DNS server IP address
Web User Interface 4-21 encryption key manager 3-23, 3-24 configuration 3-21, 4-23
autoload encryption policy 3-24 drive diagnostics
configuration 3-19, 3-30 ethernet port 3-13 head test 4-13
gateway 3-20 media test 4-13
I/O Station 3-19, 3-30 normal R/W test 4-13
B IP address 3-20 Operator Panel 4-13
IPv4 address 3-20 performance R/W test 4-13
back light
IPv6 address 3-20 SAS wrap test 4-13
Operator Panel 4-11
library access mode 3-18 drive logs, downloading 4-33
bar code labels 6-3
ordering 5-21 library configuration form F-1
library managed encryption 3-23
bar code reader 1-5
library settings 3-30 E
link speed (ethernet) 3-20 e-mail notifications
C network settings 3-20, 3-29
notification settings, e-mail 3-24
configuration 3-24
Web User Interface 4-26
cables notification settings, SNMP 3-25 e-mailing logs 6-10
reseating 6-10 NTP server 3-21, 4-26
electrical specifications 1-9
capacity scaling 5-3 random access mode 3-18, 3-30
encryption 1-5
car code labels 5-5 saving/restoring 3-28, 4-28 activation key 4-24
cartridge assignment sequential access mode 3-18, 3-30
configuration 3-22
configuration 3-19 subnet mask 3-20
key manager configuration 3-23, 3-24
cartridge magazine 1-2, 1-3, A-9 system managed encryption 3-23 policy configuration 3-24
cartridge magazines tape drives 3-19
security 4-24
emergency release 1-3 TCP/IP 3-20
Encryption Key Manager (EKM) 3-23
removing during installation 8-1 time server 3-21, 4-26 Web User Interface 4-24
unlocking 4-4 time settings 3-21, 3-31, 4-26
encryption policy
cartridge memory 5-5 user accounts 3-27
Web User Interface 4-25
cartridges 5-3 viewing settings 4-3 encryption settings
care and handling 5-8 Web User Interface 3-16
Web User Interface 4-23
cleaning 1-8, 5-4 control keys 1-2
environmental specifications 1-9
compatibility 5-3 CRUs, customer replaceable units 9-1 error codes B-1
data 1-8, 5-2 current information
library B-1
disposing 5-18 Operator Panel 4-3
tape drives B-9
moving 4-5 customer replaceable units (CRUs) 9-1 Error LED 2-2
ordering 5-19
error logs 6-2
repairing 5-11
e-mailing 6-10
shipping 5-18
error messages 6-2
WORM 5-3
Web User Interface B-10
write-protect switch 5-7

Index X-1
error status interior components library mode
Operator Panel 4-12 accessor A-9 Operator Panel 4-8
ethernet port 1-4, 3-13 cartridge magazine A-9 Web User Interface 4-21
library control board A-9 library settings
power supply A-9 configuration 3-30
F tape drive A-9 Operator Panel 4-8
inventory Web User Interface 4-21
firmware
Operator Panel 4-6 library state
updating 4-34
Web User Interface 4-19 Web User Interface 4-19
updating using ITDT 7-1
IP address library verify diagnostics 3-32
foot pads, attaching 3-2
configuration 3-20 Operator Panel 4-12
frequency, electrical supply 1-9
Operator Panel 4-10, 4-11 link speed (ethernet)
front panel
Web User Interface 4-23 configuration 3-20
cartridge magazine 1-2
IPv4 address Operator Panel 4-10
control keys 1-2
configuration 3-20 Web User Interface 4-22
LCD display 1-2
Web User Interface 4-23 logging out
LEDs 6-8
IPv4 settings Operator Panel 4-7
Operator Panel 1-2
Operator Panel 4-10, 4-11 logical library 4-21
serial number label 1-2
IPv6 address Logical Unit Number (LUN)
configuration 3-20, 4-23 scanning 1-8
IPv6 prefix length login
G Operator Panel 4-11 Web User Interface 2-5, 3-17, A-1
gateway Web User Interface 3-20, 4-23 logs
configuration 3-20 ITDT firmware update tool 7-1 e-mailing 6-10
Operator Panel 4-10, 4-11 looping
Web User Interface 3-20, 4-23 configuration 3-19, 3-30
L LUN (logical unit number) scanning 1-8
LCD contrast
H Operator Panel 4-11
hardware attributes, viewing 4-3 LEDs M
head test drive diagnostics 4-13 front panel 6-8 maintenance
height of library 1-9 interpreting 6-8 procedures 8-1
host library required tools 8-1
retrieving messages E-1 attaching RID tag 8-16 media 1-8, 5-1
SAS interface 1-4 configuration form F-1 cleaning cartridges 1-8
Host Bus Adapter (HBA) 1-8 connecting host interface cable 3-13 data cartridges 1-8
host interface cable connecting network cable 3-13 diagnostics 4-13
connecting 3-13 connecting power cord 3-14 ordering 5-19
diagnosing problems 6-3 menus 4-1
downloading drive logs 4-33 Operator Panel 4-2
I downloading library logs 4-33 Web User Interface 2-7, 4-14, A-3
error codes B-1 messages, retrieval at the host E-1
I/O Station
error messages and resolutions 6-2 mounting location, library 3-2
configuration 3-19, 3-30
installation location 3-2 moving cartridges
Operator Panel 4-7
logging out 4-7 Operator Panel 4-5
Web User Interface 4-22
moving from rack to desktop 8-2 Web User Interface 4-17
IBM Technical Support
parts list 9-1 My Notification registration 3-33
contacting 7-1
powering down 4-6
installation
preparing to ship 4-6
cartridge magazines 8-1
connecting network cable 3-13
problem reporting 6-1 N
rebooting 4-7
connecting power cord 3-14 network cable
replacing chassis 8-13
connecting to host interface connecting 3-13
sense data D-2
cable 3-13 network settings
TapeAlert flags C-1
desktop mounting kit 3-2 configuration 3-20, 3-29
troubleshooting 6-1
foot pads 3-2 ethernet port 1-4
viewing Accessor statistics 4-35
library in rack 3-7 Operator Panel 4-10
viewing logs 4-31
location 3-2 Web User Interface 4-22
viewing trace data 4-32
location in rack 3-7 Network Time Protocol (NTP) 1-7
library access mode
product environment 1-10 normal R/W test drive diagnostics 4-13
configuration 3-18
rack brackets 3-8, 8-4, 8-9 notification settings
library control board A-9
rack mounting 3-5 e-mail 3-24
library logs, downloading 4-33
rack mounting rails 3-9, 8-10 SNMP 3-25
library managed encryption
removing Accessor locking Web User Interface 4-26, 4-27
configuration 3-23
screw 3-12 NTP 1-7
Web User Interface 4-24
verifying library, diagnostics 3-32 NTP address 3-21, 4-26
library map 4-16

X-2 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

NTP server
configuration 3-21, 4-26
P sense data, definition E-2
sequential access mode
Operator Panel 4-10 parts list 9-1 configuration 3-18, 3-30
passwords Operator Panel 4-8
changing 4-11, 4-20 serial attached SCSI 1-4
O Web User Interface 2-5, A-1
performance R/W test drive
Serial attached SCSI (SAS) 1-5
serial number label 1-3
offline/online icon, Operator Panel 2-1
diagnostics 4-13 server attachment 3-13
online/offline 3-33
physical specifications 1-9 servers, supported 1-11
Operator Panel 4-6 power consumption, electrical service
Web User Interface 4-19
supply 1-9 attaching RID tag 8-16
operating procedures 4-1
power cords 9-2 service mode
operating systems, supported 1-11 connecting 3-14 Operator Panel 4-12
operational specifications 1-10
power management, tape drive 1-7 servicing library
operator interventions
power supply A-9 Web User Interface 4-30
Web User Interface 4-30 power socket 1-4 SNMP
Operator Panel 1-2, 2-1
power switch 1-4 messaging 1-6
active slots 4-8
powering down the library 4-6 SNMP notifications
auto cleaning 4-8 preparing to ship configuration 3-25
back light 4-11
Operator Panel 4-6 Web User Interface 4-27
changing password 4-11
problem diagnosis 6-3 software, supported 1-11
changing passwords 4-11 product environment 1-10 specifications
cleaning drives 4-5
electrical 1-9
current information 4-3
environmental 1-9
date settings 4-9
default settings 4-11
R operational 1-10
physical 1-9
DHCP 4-10, 4-11 rack mounting 3-7
installation 3-5 speed matching 1-7
diagnostics 4-12, 4-13
SSL 3-20, 4-23
display elements 2-1 installing rails 3-9, 8-10
SSL, security 4-24
drive diagnostics 4-13 location in rack 3-7
rack brackets 3-8, 8-4, 8-9 storage capacity 1-10
error status 4-12
subnet mask
gateway 4-10, 4-11 random access mode
configuration 3-20
I/O Station 4-7 configuration 3-18, 3-30
Operator Panel 4-8 Operator Panel 4-10, 4-11
inventory 4-6
Web User Interface 4-23
IP address 4-10, 4-11 Ready/Activity LED 2-1
system managed encryption
IPv4 settings 4-10, 4-11 rear panel
Accessor locking screw 1-4 configuration 3-23
IPv6 prefix length 4-11
Web User Interface 4-24
LCD contrast 4-11 ethernet port 1-4
system summary
library mode 4-8 power button 1-4
power connector 1-4 Web User Interface 4-15
library settings 4-8
library verify diagnostics 4-12 SAS host interface 1-4
link speed (ethernet) 4-10 rebooting
logging out 4-7 Operator Panel 4-7 T
moving cartridges 4-5 reporting library problems 6-1 tape drive A-9
network settings 3-29, 4-10 reseating cables 6-10 channel calibration 1-7
NTP server 4-10 resetting drive power management 1-7
offline/online icon 2-1 Web User Interface 4-33 speed matching 1-7
online/offline 4-6 resetting library tape drives
operating procedures 4-1 Web User Interface 4-33 cleaning 4-5
panel settings 4-11 retrieving messages at the host E-1 configuration 3-19
preparing to ship 4-6 revision diagnostics 4-13
random access mode 4-8 Operator Panel 4-3 downloading drive logs 4-33
rebooting 4-7 RID tag, attaching to library 8-16 error codes B-9
revision 4-3 sense data D-3
sequential access mode 4-8 TapeAlert flags C-3
service mode 4-12 S unloading 4-5
subnet mask 4-10, 4-11 TapeAlert flags C-1
SAS host interface 1-4, 1-5
time settings 4-9 library C-1
SAS interface 3-13
top menu 4-2 SAS wrap test drive diagnostics 4-13 tape drives C-3
unloading drives 4-5 TCP/IP configuration 3-20
saving/restoring configuration
unlocking I/O Station 4-4 Web User Interface 4-22
Web User Interface 4-28
unlocking magazines 4-4 SCSI sense data E-2 Telnet Service Port A-5
viewing settings 4-3 time server
security 4-24
address 3-21, 4-26
sense data
key definitions D-1 configuration 3-21, 4-26
library D-2
tape drives D-3

Index X-3
time settings
configuration 3-21, 3-31, 4-26
V IPv6 configuration 4-23
IPv6 prefix length 3-20, 4-23
Operator Panel 4-9 verifying library, diagnostics 3-32 library managed encryption 4-24
tools, required 8-1 viewing communications library map 4-15
trace data, viewing 4-32 information 4-3 library mode 4-21
trap notifications viewing hardware attributes 4-3 library settings 4-21
configuration 3-25 viewing library logs library state 4-19
types B-12 Web User Interface 4-31 link speed (ethernet) 4-22
Web User Interface 4-27 viewing settings login 2-5, 3-17, A-1
troubleshooting 6-1 Operator Panel 4-3 menus 2-7, A-3
Web User Interface 4-15 moving cartridges 4-17
vital product data A-9 network settings 4-22
U voltage, electrical supply 1-9 notification settings 4-26, 4-27
online/offline 4-19
Ultrium tape drives 1-7
operating procedures 4-1
unloading drives
Operator Panel 4-5
W operator interventions 4-30
Web User Interface 2-5, 4-21, A-1 passwords 2-5, A-1
Web User Interface 4-18
resetting drive 4-33
unlocking I/O Station Accessor statistics 4-35
resetting library 4-33
Operator Panel 4-4 account types 2-6, A-2
active slots 4-22 saving/restoring configuration 4-28
unlocking magazines
servicing library 4-30
Operator Panel 4-4 application managed encryption 4-24
SNMP notifications 4-27
updating firmware auto cleaning 4-21
subnet mask 4-23
Web User Interface 4-34 cleaning drives 4-18
configuring library 3-16 system managed encryption 4-24
user accounts
system summary 4-15
configuration 3-27 display elements 2-6, A-3
TCP/IP configuration 4-22
Web User Interface 4-20 downloading drive logs 4-33
downloading library logs 4-33 top menu 4-14
user interface
unloading drives 4-18
Operator Panel 2-1 e-mail notifications 4-26
updating firmware 4-34
Web User Interface 2-1 Encryption Key Manager (EKM) 4-24
encryption policy 4-25 user accounts 4-20
user privileges, Web User Interface 2-8,
user privileges 2-8, A-3
A-3 encryption settings 4-23
viewing library logs 4-31
error messages B-10
gateway 3-20, 4-23 viewing settings 4-15
viewing trace data 4-32
I/O Station 4-22
weight of library 1-9
inventory 4-19
IP address 4-23 width of library 1-9
WORM cartridges 5-3
IPv4 configuration 4-23

X-4 TS2900 Tape Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide

Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You
IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape Autoloader
Setup, Operator, and Service Guide
Machine Type 3572

Publication No. GC27-2212-00

We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy,
organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the
information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.

For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your
IBM business partner, or your authorized remarketer.

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use
the personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.

Comments:

Thank you for your support.

Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.
If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:

Name Address

Company or Organization

Phone No. E-mail address

 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You Cut or Fold
GC27-2212-00  Along Line

_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

International Business Machines Corporation

Information Development
Department 61C
9032 South Rita Road
Tucson, Arizona
USA 85775-4401

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold
GC27-2212-00 Along Line


Part Number: 45E3877

Printed in USA

(1P) P/N: 45E3877

GC27-2212-00
Spine information:

IBM System Storage TS2900 Tape

 Autoloader Setup, Operator, and Service Guide Machine Type 3572